KR20210137873A - User interface for audio message - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention generally relates to managing audio messages. In some examples, user interfaces for recording and sending an audio message is described. In some examples, user interfaces for displaying notifications are described. In some examples, user interfaces for displaying visual indications are described. In some examples, user interfaces for managing external devices are described. In some examples, user interfaces for playing back audio messages are described. In some examples, user interfaces for managing external devices are described. In some examples, user interfaces for playing audio messages are described.

Description

USER INTERFACE FOR AUDIO MESSAGE

Cross-referencing of related applications

This application relates to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/023,225, filed May 11, 2020 and entitled "USER INTERFACE FOR AUDIO MESSAGE," the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

technical field

FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more particularly to techniques for managing audio messages.

Users send instant messages to communicate with other users using alphanumeric text. Such messaging techniques typically require the user to enter text using a keyboard, or the device to transcribe the audio into text and subsequently transmit it. Users interact with external devices using mobile devices. Such interactions are often cumbersome and require the user to interact with multiple external devices individually.

Current techniques for managing audio messages using electronic devices are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster and more efficient methods and interfaces for managing audio messages. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for managing messages. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on the user and create a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. Such methods and interfaces allow messages to be transmitted that include the tone of the message (eg, importance, seriousness, sarcasticity, sadness, cheerfulness), rather than just the phrase of the message, and the recipient can use the speaker's own voice. to recognize the speaker of the message. Such methods and interfaces also reduce or eliminate the need to provide input using a keyboard or to calibrate a transcription using input.

Current techniques for managing states of external devices in a mobile device are generally cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and time-consuming user interface, which may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster and more efficient methods and interfaces for managing external devices. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for managing external devices, such as allowing a user to manage external devices individually or simultaneously managing external devices through a single input. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on the user and create a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed on a computer system in communication with a display generating component. The method includes, via a display creation component, a first selectable user interface object - selection of a first selectable user interface object, initiating a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices; the set of devices includes a first set of one or more external devices and a second set of one or more external devices; and a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device. displaying a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and in response to receiving the request to display a second user interface, displaying a second user interface, the second user interface comprising: a second selectable user interface object - a second selectable user interface object the selecting initiates a process for recording the second audio message and transmitting the second audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting the second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices; and a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device. .

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generating component, the one or more programs, via the display generating component, comprising: a first selectable user interface Object - selection of a first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and transmitting a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising a first set of one or more external devices and one or more external devices comprising a second set of devices; and a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device. for displaying a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, for receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, instructions for displaying a second user interface, the second user interface comprising: a second selectable user interface object - a second selectable user interface object selecting to initiate a process for recording the second audio message and transmitting the second audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting the second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices; and a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device. .

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generating component, the one or more programs, via the display generating component, comprising: a first selectable user interface object - selection of a first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising a first set of one or more external devices and one or more external devices comprising a second set of; and a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device. for displaying a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, for receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, instructions for displaying a second user interface, the second user interface comprising: a second selectable user interface object - a second selectable user interface object selecting to initiate a process for recording the second audio message and transmitting the second audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting the second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices; and a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device. .

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes one or more processors, the computer system in communication with the display generating component; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, wherein the one or more programs, via the display creation component, cause: a first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object initiating a process for recording and transmitting a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices including a first set of one or more external devices and a second set of one or more external devices; and a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device. for displaying a first user interface; while displaying the first user interface, for receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, instructions for displaying a second user interface, the second user interface comprising: a second selectable user interface object - a second selectable user interface object selecting to initiate a process for recording the second audio message and transmitting the second audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting the second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices; and a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device. .

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system, via a display creation component in communication with the computer system, includes: a first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object is a process for recording and transmitting a first audio message to the set of external devices discloses, wherein the set of external devices includes a first set of one or more external devices and a second set of one or more external devices; and a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device. means for displaying a first user interface; means for receiving, while displaying the first user interface, an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, means for displaying a second user interface, the second user interface comprising: a second selectable user interface object - a second selectable user interface object selecting to initiate a process for recording the second audio message and transmitting the second audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting the second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices; and a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device. .

According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed on a computer system in communication with a display generating component. The method includes: receiving first data corresponding to a first medium; displaying, via the display creation component, a first notification having an indication of the first media until the end of the first period of time; after receiving the first data, receiving second data corresponding to a second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and upon a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time at which the second data was received and (2) a time at which the first data was received, via the display generating component: until the end of the second period of time, displaying a second notification having an indication of the first media, where the end of the first period is different from the end of the second period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generating component, the one or more programs configured to: for; displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having a presentation of the first media until the end of the first period of time; after receiving the first data, to receive second data corresponding to the second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and upon a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time at which the second data was received and (2) a time at which the first data was received, via the display generating component: until the end of the second period of time, to display a second notification with an indication of the first media, where the end of the first period is different from the end of the second period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with the display generating component, the one or more programs configured to: ; displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having a presentation of the first media until the end of the first period of time; after receiving the first data, to receive second data corresponding to the second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and upon a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time at which the second data was received and (2) a time at which the first data was received, via the display generating component: until the end of the second period of time, to display a second notification with an indication of the first media, where the end of the first period is different from the end of the second period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes one or more processors, the computer system in communication with the display generating component; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs configured to: receive first data corresponding to a first medium; displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having a presentation of the first media until the end of the first period of time; after receiving the first data, to receive second data corresponding to the second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and upon a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time at which the second data was received and (2) a time at which the first data was received, via the display generating component: until the end of the second period of time, to display a second notification with an indication of the first media, where the end of the first period is different from the end of the second period.

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes means for receiving first data corresponding to a first media; means for displaying, via a generating component in communication with the computer system, a first notification having an indication of the first media until an end of the first period of time; means for receiving, after receiving the first data, second data corresponding to the second media, the second media being different from the first media; and upon a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time at which the second data was received and (2) a time at which the first data was received, via the display generating component: means for displaying, until the end of the second period of time, a second notification having an indication of the first media, the end of the first period being different from the end of the second period of time.

According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed in an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices. The method includes receiving voice input via one or more microphones; and displaying a visual indication of the voice input, wherein in accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in the first set of colors; In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices may include one or more colors different from the first set of one or more colors. displaying the visual indication as a second set of

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices, the one or more programs comprising: for receiving voice input via one or more microphones; and displaying a visual indication of the voice input, wherein in accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in the first set of colors; In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices may include: and displaying the visual indication in a second set.

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. A transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices, the one or more programs comprising: for receiving voice input via microphones; and displaying a visual indication of the voice input, wherein in accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in the first set of colors; In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices may include: and displaying the visual indication in a second set.

According to some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device may include one or more microphones; one or more speakers; one or more display devices; one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs configured to: receive voice input via the one or more microphones; and displaying a visual indication of the voice input, wherein in accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in the first set of colors; In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices may include: and displaying the visual indication in a second set.

According to some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device may include one or more microphones; one or more speakers; one or more display devices; means for receiving voice input via the one or more microphones; and means for displaying a visual indication of the voice input, wherein in accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises one or more colors. displaying a visual indication as a first set of In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices may include: and displaying the visual indication in a second set.

According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed at a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices. The method includes, via a display creation component, displaying a first status indicator indicating that a plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are configured as a first accessory a first accessory device of type and in a first state; and a second accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state and different from the first accessory device; while displaying the first status indicator, detecting a gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state. do; displaying, via the display creation component, a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a second type different from the gesture of the first type and is for a first status indicator; - selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state.

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising: for displaying a first status indicator indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are of a first accessory type and are in a first state device; and a second accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state and different from the first accessory device; while displaying the first status indicator, for detecting a gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state. do; Display, via the display creation component, a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a second type different from the gesture of the first type and is for a first status indicator; for - selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state.

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. A transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs, via the display generating component, first 1 for displaying a first status indicator indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type are in a first state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type being of a first accessory type and in a first state ; and a second accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state and different from the first accessory device; while displaying the first status indicator, for detecting a gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state. do; Display, via the display creation component, a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a second type different from the gesture of the first type and is for a first status indicator; for - selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state.

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes one or more processors, the computer system in communication with the display generating component and one or more input devices; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, wherein the one or more programs indicate, via the display generating component, that the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state. for displaying a first status indicator, the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type comprising: a first accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state; and a second accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state and different from the first accessory device; while displaying the first status indicator, for detecting a gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state. do; Display, via the display creation component, a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a second type different from the gesture of the first type and is for a first status indicator; for - selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state.

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system provides, via the display generating component, means for displaying a first status indicator indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type include: a first accessory device of an accessory type and in a first state; and a second accessory device of a first accessory type and in a first state and different from the first accessory device; means for detecting a gesture while displaying the first status indicator; and in response to detecting the gesture, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state. do; displaying, via the display creation component, a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a second type different from the gesture of the first type and is for a first status indicator; means for - selecting the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state.

According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method is performed at a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices. The method includes, via a display creation component, displaying a media user interface, wherein the media user interface comprises, at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and at a second location different from the first location, the second location. contain a second representation of the media message; in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on user input corresponding to the media user interface, playing the first media message; and in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. do.

In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising: for displaying a media user interface, the media user interface comprising, at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and at a second location different from the first location, a second representation of a second media message; ; in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface, to play the first media message; and in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. include

In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs, via the display generating component, media for displaying a user interface, the media user interface comprising, at a first location, a first representation of the first media message, and at a second location different from the first location, a second representation of the second media message; in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface, to play the first media message; and in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. include

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes one or more processors, the computer system in communication with the display generating component and one or more input devices; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, wherein the one or more programs, via a display creation component, for displaying a media user interface, the media user interface comprising: a first representation of the first media message, and a second representation of the second media message at a second location different from the first location; in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface, to play the first media message; and in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. include

In accordance with some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is in communication with the display generating component and one or more input devices. The computer system includes, via the display generating component, means for displaying a media user interface, wherein the media user interface comprises, at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and at a second location different from the first location, 2 contains a second representation of the media message; means for playing the first media message in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface; and in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, means for displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. include

Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

Accordingly, devices are provided with faster and more efficient methods and interfaces for managing audio messages, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces may supplement or replace other methods for managing audio messages.

For a better understanding of the variously described embodiments, reference should be made to the specific details for carrying out the following invention in connection with the following drawings in which like reference numerals indicate corresponding parts throughout.
1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display, in accordance with some embodiments.
1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing, in accordance with some embodiments.
2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen, in accordance with some embodiments.
3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with some embodiments.
4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, in accordance with some embodiments.
4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device having a touch-sensitive surface separate from a display, in accordance with some embodiments.
5A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
5C-5D illustrate example components of a personal electronic device having a touch-sensitive display and intensity sensors, in accordance with some embodiments.
5E-5H illustrate example components and user interfaces of a personal electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments.
5I illustrates an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
5J is a block diagram illustrating an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
6 is a diagram illustrating an example set of devices and a physical structure, in accordance with some embodiments.
7A-7A illustrate example user interfaces for sending an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments.
8A and 8B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for transmitting an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments.
9A-9X illustrate example user interfaces for displaying notifications, in accordance with some embodiments.
10 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying notifications, in accordance with some embodiments.
11A-11R illustrate example user interfaces for displaying visual indications, in accordance with some embodiments.
12 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying visual indications, in accordance with some embodiments.
13A-13N illustrate example user interfaces for managing external devices, in accordance with some embodiments.
14 is a flowchart illustrating a method for managing external devices, in accordance with some embodiments.
15A-15F illustrate example user interfaces for playing audio messages, in accordance with some embodiments.
16 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for playing audio messages in accordance with some embodiments.

The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. It should be appreciated, however, that this description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the invention, but instead is provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

A need exists for electronic devices that provide efficient methods and interfaces for managing audio messages. Techniques for managing audio messages increase the efficiency of devices (eg, reduce unnecessary display), increase information provided about external devices (eg, display the source of audio messages), and increase privacy) by providing the user with visual feedback of the state of the device with respect to audio input. Such techniques can reduce the cognitive burden on a user of using audio messages, thereby improving productivity. Additionally, such techniques may reduce processor and battery power that would otherwise be wasted on excessive user inputs.

1A and 1B, 2, 3, 4A and 4B, and 5A-5J provide descriptions of example devices for performing techniques for transmitting and receiving audio messages, below. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example set of devices and a physical structure for performing techniques for transmitting and receiving audio messages, in accordance with some embodiments.

7A-7A illustrate example user interfaces for sending an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments. 8A and 8B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for transmitting an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 7A-7A are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIGS. 8A and 8B .

9A-9X illustrate example user interfaces for displaying notifications, in accordance with some embodiments. 10 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying notifications, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 9A-9X are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 10 .

11A-11R illustrate example user interfaces for displaying visual indications. 12 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying visual indications. The user interfaces of FIGS. 11A-11R are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 12 .

13A-13N illustrate example user interfaces for managing states of devices. 14 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing states of devices. The user interfaces of FIGS. 13A-13N are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 14 .

15A-15F illustrate example user interfaces for playing audio messages, in accordance with some embodiments. 16 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for playing audio messages in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 15A-15F are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 16 .

Although the following description uses terms such as "first", "second", etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch may be referred to as a second touch, and similarly, a second touch may be referred to as a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various embodiments described. The first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.

The terminology used in the description of the variously described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing the specific embodiments only, and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and in the appended claims, the singular forms "a", "an", and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. It is intended It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the listed associated items. The terms “include,” “including,” “comprise,” and/or “comprising,” as used herein, refer to the recited features, integers Specifies the presence of steps, steps, actions, elements, and/or components, but the presence of one or more other features, integers, steps, actions, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. It will be further understood that the addition is not excluded.

The term “if” is, optionally, depending on the context, “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “ interpreted to mean "in response to detecting". Similarly, the phrases “when it is determined that” or “when [the stated condition or event] is detected” are, optionally, depending on the context, “when determined that” or “in response to determining that” or “ be construed to mean "on detecting [the stated condition or event]" or "in response to detecting [the stated condition or event]."

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile phone, that also includes other functions such as PDA and/or music player functions. Illustrative embodiments of portable multifunction devices are limited to iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA. include without Other portable electronic devices such as laptop or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (eg, touch screen displays and/or touchpads) are optionally used. It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device but a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch screen display and/or a touchpad).

In the discussion below, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user interface devices such as a physical keyboard, mouse and/or joystick.

A device typically supports a variety of applications such as one or more of the following: drawing applications, presentation applications, word processing applications, website creation applications, disk authoring applications, spreadsheet applications, gaming applications, phone applications, video conferencing applications, email applications, instant messaging applications, exercise support applications, photo management applications, digital camera applications, digital video camera applications, web browsing applications, digital music player applications, and/or digital video player applications.

Various applications running on the device optionally use at least one common physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adjusted and/or changed from one application to the next and/or within each application. In this way, the universal physical architecture (such as a touch-sensitive surface) of the device supports a variety of applications, optionally with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

Attention is now directed to embodiments of portable devices having touch-sensitive displays. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes referred to as a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes known or referred to as a “touch-sensitive display system”. Device 100 includes memory 102 (optionally including one or more computer-readable storage media), memory controller 122 , one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF Circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem 106 , other input control devices 116 , and external port 124 . includes Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 . Device 100 may optionally include one or more contact intensity sensors to detect intensity of contacts on device 100 (eg, a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ). (165). Device 100 may optionally be configured with a touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or a touchpad 355 of device 300 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (eg, with touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ) one or more tactile output generators 167 (for generating tactile outputs on the same touch-sensitive surface). These components optionally communicate via one or more communication buses or signal lines 103 .

As used in the specification and claims, the term “strength” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (eg, finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or touch Refers to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of contact on a sensitive surface. The intensity of the contact has a range of values including at least four distinct values and more typically including hundreds (eg, at least 256) distinct values. The intensity of the contact is optionally determined (or measured) using various approaches, and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (eg, weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of the stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size and/or changes thereto of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the capacitance and/or changes thereto of the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact, and/or the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact The resistance and/or changes thereto are optionally used as a substitute for the force or pressure of contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the surrogate measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (eg, the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the surrogate measurements). In some implementations, substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (eg, an intensity threshold). is the pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of the contact as a property of the user input may not otherwise display affordances (eg, on a touch-sensitive display) and/or (eg, a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or Enables user access to additional device functions that may not be accessible by the user on reduced sized devices with limited footprint to receive user input (via physical/mechanical controls such as knobs or buttons) make it

As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to the physical displacement of a device relative to its previous position, a component of the device (eg, a touch-sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (eg, a housing). ), or the displacement of a component with respect to the center of mass of the device to be detected by the user using the user's tactile sense. For example, in situations where a device or component of a device is in contact with a touch-sensitive user's surface (eg, a finger, palm, or other portion of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement may to be interpreted as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in the physical properties of a component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is optionally interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" of a physical actuator button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation such as a "down click" or "up click" even in the absence of movement of a physical actuator button associated with a touch-sensitive surface that is physically depressed (eg, displaced) by movement of the user. . As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is optionally interpreted or sensed by the user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in flatness of the touch-sensitive surface. Although these interpretations of touch by the user will be susceptible to the user's individualized sensory perception, there are many touch sensory perceptions common to the majority of users. Thus, when tactile output is described as corresponding to a user's specific sensory perception (eg, "up click", "down click", "roughness"), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output is typical (or average) corresponds to the physical displacement of the device or component thereof that will produce the described sensory perception for the user.

Device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and device 100 may optionally have more or fewer components than shown, optionally combine two or more components, or optionally a component It should be understood that they have a different configuration or arrangement of the The various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing circuits and/or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).

Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and, optionally, one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. non-volatile memory such as Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100 .

Peripheral interface 118 may be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102 . One or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to process data and to perform various functions for device 100 . In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118 , CPU 120 , and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104 . In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.

Radio frequency (RF) circuitry 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also referred to as electromagnetic signals. The RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communication networks and other communication devices via the electromagnetic signals. The RF circuitry 108 may optionally include, but is not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and the like. However, it includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions. The RF circuitry 108 may optionally include networks such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a MAN. (metropolitan area network), and communicates with other devices by wireless communication. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, eg, by a short-range communication radio. Wireless communication is optionally, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution (EV-DO), Data-Only), HSPA, HSPA+, DC-HSPDA (Dual-Cell HSPA), LTE (long term evolution), NFC (near field communication), W-CDMA (wideband code division multiple access), CDMA (code division multiple access) ), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth (Bluetooth), Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (eg, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, protocols for email (eg, Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (eg, extensible messaging (XMPP)) and presence protocol), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or communications not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. protocols, including any other suitable It uses any of a plurality of communication standards, protocols and technologies including, but not limited to, a communication protocol.

The audio circuitry 110 , the speaker 111 , and the microphone 113 provide an audio interface between the user and the device 100 . The audio circuit unit 110 receives audio data from the peripheral device interface 118 , converts the audio data into an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to the speaker 111 . The speaker 111 converts the electrical signal into sound waves that can be heard by humans. The audio circuitry 110 also receives an electrical signal converted from sound waves by the microphone 113 . The audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal into audio data and transmits the audio data to the peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is optionally fetched from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (eg, 212 in FIG. 2 ). The headset jack is a connection between the audio circuitry 110 and detachable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones, or a headset that has both an output (eg, one or both ear headphones) and an input (eg, a microphone). Provides an interface.

I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100 , such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116 , to peripherals interface 118 . I/O subsystem 106 may optionally include display controller 156, light sensor controller 158, depth camera controller 169, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and other inputs or one or more input controllers 160 for control devices. One or more input controllers 160 receive/transmit electrical signals to/from other input control devices 116 . Other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (eg, push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and the like. In some alternative embodiments, the input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to (or not coupled to) any of a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. not). One or more buttons (eg, 208 in FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of the speaker 111 and/or the microphone 113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (eg, 206 in FIG. 2 ).

A quick press of the push button optionally initiates the processes of using gestures on the touch screen to selectively unlock the touch screen 112, or to unlock the device, which occurs December 23, 2005 As described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/322,549, filed on the date of "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image," U.S. Patent No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. do. A longer press of the push button (eg, 206 ) selectively powers on or off the device 100 . The functionality of one or more buttons is, optionally, customizable. The touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

The touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and the user. Display controller 156 receives and/or transmits electrical signals to/from touch screen 112 . Touch screen 112 displays a visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively referred to as “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user interface objects.

Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from a user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions within memory 102) contact (and any movement or cessation of contact) on touch screen 112 . ) and converts the detected contact into interaction with user interface objects (eg, one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) displayed on the touch screen 112 . In an exemplary embodiment, the point of contact between the touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger.

Touch screen 112 optionally uses liquid crystal display (LCD) technology, light emitting polymer display (LPD) technology, or light emitting diode (LED) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. The touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally provide one or more points of contact with the touch screen 112, or other proximity sensor arrays, as well as capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies. Detecting a contact and any movement or interruption thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies, currently known or later developed, including, but not limited to, other factors for determining. In an exemplary embodiment, a projected mutual capacitance sensing technology such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA is used.

The touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of the touch screen 112 may optionally be described in US Pat. , and/or the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in US Patent Publication No. 2002/0015024A1, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100 , while touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (1) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/381,313, filed May 2, 2006, "Multipoint Touch Surface Controller"; (2) US Patent Application Serial No. 10/840,862, "Multipoint Touchscreen", filed May 6, 2004; (3) US Patent Application Serial No. 10/903,964, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed on July 30, 2004; (4) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/048,264, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed on January 31, 2005; (5) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/038,590, "Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices," filed on January 18, 2005; (6) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/228,758, "Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (7) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/228,700, "Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface," filed September 16, 2005; (8) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/228,737, "Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard," filed September 16, 2005; and (9) US Patent Application Serial No. 11/367,749, "Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device", filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution greater than 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user, optionally, makes contact with the touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, finger, or the like. In some embodiments, the user interface is primarily designed to operate using finger-based contacts and gestures, which may be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger contact area of the finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device converts coarse finger-based input into precise pointer/cursor positions or commands for the user to perform desired actions.

In some embodiments, in addition to a touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating certain functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface separate from the touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

Device 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 may optionally include a power management system, one or more power sources (eg, a battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharge system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator ( light emitting diodes (LEDs), for example), and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power within portable devices.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 . 1A shows a light sensor coupled to a light sensor controller 158 in the I/O subsystem 106 . Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. The light sensor 164 receives light from the surrounding environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also referred to as camera module), optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the back of the device 100 opposite the touch screen display 112 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display can be used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. let there be In some embodiments, an optical sensor is positioned on the front of the device such that, optionally, an image of the user is obtained for the videoconference while the user views other videoconference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of the optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (eg, by rotating the sensor and a lens within the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 can image along with the touch screen display. It is intended to be used for both conference and still and/or video image acquisition.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more depth camera sensors 175 . 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to a depth camera controller 169 in the I/O subsystem 106 . The depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to generate a three-dimensional model of an object (eg, a face) in the scene from a viewpoint (eg, a depth camera sensor). In some embodiments, in conjunction with imaging module 143 (also referred to as camera module), depth camera sensor 175 optionally determines a depth map of different portions of an image captured by imaging module 143 . used to do In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor is located on the front of device 100 , optionally allowing a user to capture selfies using depth map data and while viewing other videoconference participants on the touch screen display. to allow an image of the user with depth information to be acquired for video conferencing. In some embodiments, the depth camera sensor 175 is located on the back of the device, or on the back and front of the device 100 . In some embodiments, the position of the depth camera sensor 175 may be changed by the user (eg, by rotating a lens and sensor within the device housing) so that the depth camera sensor 175 is videoconferencing with the touch screen display. and both still and/or video image acquisition.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 . 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to an intensity sensor controller 159 in the I/O subsystem 106 . Contact intensity sensor 165 may optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electrical force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (eg, sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface. The contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (eg, pressure information or a surrogate for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with or proximate to a touch-sensitive surface (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 ). In some embodiments, the at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of the device 100 opposite the touch screen display 112 positioned on the front of the device 100 .

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more proximity sensors 166 . 1A shows a proximity sensor 166 coupled to a peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, the proximity sensor 166 is optionally coupled to an input controller 160 in the I/O subsystem 106 . Proximity sensor 166 is optionally described in U.S. Patent Applications Serial Nos. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device;” 11/240,788, "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/620,702, "Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output"; 11/586,862, "Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices"; and 11/638,251, "Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals," which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables the touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (eg, when the user is on a phone call).

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 . 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to a haptic feedback controller 161 in the I/O subsystem 106 . Tactile output generator 167 optionally generates one or more electroacoustic devices, such as speakers or other audio components, and/or a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generator. Electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion, such as a component (eg, a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). The contact intensity sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from the haptic feedback module 133 to generate tactile outputs on the device 100 that can be sensed by a user of the device 100 . In some embodiments, the at least one tactile output generator is positioned with or proximate a touch-sensitive surface (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 ), and optionally, vertically (eg, vertically) the touch-sensitive surface. , generates a tactile output by moving it in/out of the surface of the device 100 ) or laterally (eg, back and forth in the same plane as the surface of the device 100 ). In some embodiments, the at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of the device 100 opposite the touch screen display 112 positioned on the front of the device 100 .

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more accelerometers 168 . 1A shows an accelerometer 168 coupled to a peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, the accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled to an input controller 160 within the I/O subsystem 106 . Accelerometer 168 is optionally described in US Patent Publication Nos. 20050190059, "Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices," and US Patent Publication Nos. 2006017692, "Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An. Accelerometer", both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. Device 100 may optionally include a magnetometer, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168 , and GPS (or GLONASS or other global) to obtain information regarding the position and orientation (eg, longitudinal or transverse) of device 100 . navigation system) receiver.

In some embodiments, software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126 , communication module (or set of instructions) 128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130 , graphics module ( or set of instructions) 132 , a text input module (or set of instructions) 134 , a GPS module (or set of instructions) 135 , and applications (or sets of instructions) 136 . . Furthermore, in some embodiments, the memory (102 in FIG. 1A or 370 in FIG. 3 ) stores device/global internal state 157 as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3 . The device/global internal state 157, if present, includes an active application state indicating which applications are currently active; a display state indicating which applications, views, or other information occupy the various areas of the touch screen display 112 ; sensor status, including information obtained from various sensors and input control devices 116 of the device; and location information regarding the location and/or posture of the device.

Operating system 126 (eg, an embedded operating system such as Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or VxWorks) performs general system tasks (eg, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) It includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing the software, and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

Communication module 128 enables communication with other devices via one or more external ports 124 , and also provides various functions for processing data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external ports 124 . Includes software components. External port 124 (eg, USB, FIREWIRE, etc.) is configured to couple directly to other devices or indirectly through a network (eg, Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (eg, 30-pin) connector that is the same as, similar to, and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with the touch screen 112 (in conjunction with the display controller 156 ), and other touch-sensitive devices (eg, a touchpad or physical click wheel). . The contact/motion module 130 is configured to determine whether a contact has occurred (eg, to detect a finger-down event), the strength of the contact (eg, force or pressure of the contact, or determining a force or substitute for pressure of a contact), determining whether there is movement of a contact to track movement across a touch-sensitive surface (eg, one or more finger-dragging events); )), and determining whether the contact has ceased (eg, detecting a finger-up event or contact cessation). It includes various software components to perform. The contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining the movement of the point of contact represented by the set of contact data optionally determines a speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. includes doing These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (eg, one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (eg, "multi-touch"/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect a contact on the touchpad.

In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 is a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action was performed by a user (eg, to determine whether a user "clicked" on an icon). use the In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined according to software parameters (eg, the intensity thresholds are not determined by activation thresholds of particular physical actuators, but changing the physical hardware of the device 100 ) can be adjusted without). For example, the mouse "click" threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a wide range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device (eg, by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system level click "Intensity" parameter) can select one of a set of intensity thresholds. Software settings are provided for adjusting the anomaly.

The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by the user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (eg, different motions, timings, and/or intensities of the detected contacts). Thus, the gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a specific contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture may include detecting a finger-down event followed by a finger-down event at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger-down event (eg, at the location of the icon). and detecting an up (liftoff) event. As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on a touch-sensitive surface detects a finger-down event followed by one or more finger-dragging events, followed by a finger-up (lift-off) event. ) to detect the event.

The graphics module 132 renders and renders graphics on the touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual effect (eg, brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of the displayed graphic. It includes various well-known software components for display. As used herein, the term “graphic” includes, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (eg, user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like. , including any object that can be displayed to the user.

In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives one or more codes from applications, etc. that specify a graphic to be displayed, along with coordinate data and other graphic attribute data, if necessary, and then generates screen image data to display controller 156 . print out

The haptic feedback module 133 is used by the tactile output generator(s) 167 to generate tactile outputs at one or more locations on the device 100 in response to user interactions with the device 100 . It includes various software components for generating instructions.

The text input module 134 , optionally a component of the graphics module 132 , can be used for various applications (eg, contacts 137 , email 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and text input It provides soft keyboards for entering text into any other application).

GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and uses this information for use in various applications (eg, to phone 138 for use in location-based dialing; camera 143 as photo/video metadata). and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets and map/navigation widgets).

Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

연락처 모듈(137)(때때로 주소록 또는 연락처 목록으로 지칭됨);

contacts module 137 (sometimes referred to as an address book or contact list);

전화 모듈(138);

phone module 138;

화상 회의 모듈(139);

video conferencing module 139;

이메일 클라이언트 모듈(140);

email client module 140;

인스턴트 메시징(IM) 모듈(141);

an instant messaging (IM) module 141;

운동 지원 모듈(142);

exercise support module 142;

정지 및/또는 비디오 이미지들을 위한 카메라 모듈(143);

a camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

이미지 관리 모듈(144);

image management module 144;

비디오 재생기 모듈;

video player module;

음악 재생기 모듈;

music player module;

브라우저 모듈(147);

browser module 147;

캘린더 모듈(148);

calendar module 148;

날씨 위젯(149-1), 주식 위젯(149-2), 계산기 위젯(149-3), 알람 시계 위젯(149-4), 사전 위젯(149-5), 및 사용자에 의해 얻어지는 다른 위젯들뿐 아니라 사용자-생성 위젯들(149-6) 중 하나 이상을 선택적으로 포함하는 위젯 모듈들(149);

Weather widget 149-1, stock widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user only but also widget modules 149 that optionally include one or more of user-created widgets 149-6;

사용자-생성 위젯들(149-6)을 만들기 위한 위젯 생성기 모듈(150);

a widget generator module 150 for creating user-created widgets 149-6;

검색 모듈(151);

search module 151;

비디오 재생기 모듈 및 음악 재생기 모듈을 통합하는 비디오 및 음악 재생기 모듈(152);

a video and music player module 152 incorporating a video player module and a music player module;

메모 모듈(153);

memo module 153;

지도 모듈(154); 및/또는

map module 154; and/or

온라인 비디오 모듈(155).

Online video module (155).

Examples of other applications 136 optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption , digital rights management, voice recognition and voice cloning.

Along with touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 and text input module 134 , contacts module 137 may optionally include an address book or contact list ( stored in application internal state 192 of, for example, memory 102 or contacts module 137 in memory 370), which includes: adding the name(s) to the address book; thing; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating a name with a phone number(s), email address(es), physical address(es), or other information; associating an image with a name; sorting and sorting names; providing phone numbers or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communication by phone 138 , video conferencing module 139 , email 140 , or IM 141 , and the like.

RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , and text In conjunction with the input module 134 , the phone module 138 optionally enters a sequence of characters corresponding to a phone number, accesses one or more phone numbers in the contacts module 137 , and modifies the entered phone number. It is used to call, dial individual phone numbers, have a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is complete. As noted above, wireless communications optionally use any of a plurality of communication standards, protocols and technologies.

RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , optical sensor 164 , optical sensor controller 158 , contact/motion Together with the module 130 , the graphics module 132 , the text input module 134 , the contacts module 137 and the phone module 138 , the video conferencing module 139 communicates with the user according to user instructions. and executable instructions for initiating, conducting, and terminating a video conference between participants.

Along with RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 and text input module 134 , email client module 140 provides user instruction executable instructions for composing, sending, receiving, and managing email in response to Together with the image management module 144 , the email client module 140 greatly facilitates creating and sending emails with still or video images taken with the camera module 143 .

Along with RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 and text input module 134 , instant messaging module 141 is Enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a message, modify previously entered characters (eg, Short Message Service (SMS) for phone-based instant messages) or Multimedia Message Service (Multimedia Message Service) , MMS) protocol, or using XMPP, SIMPLE or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), including executable instructions to send, receive instant messages, and view received instant messages. . In some embodiments, sent and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as supported by MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to phone-based messages (eg, messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (eg, messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS). ) refers to both.

RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154 , and in conjunction with the music player module, the exercise support module 142 may devise exercises (eg, along with time, distance, and/or calorie expenditure goals); communicate with motion sensors (sports devices); receive motion sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor movement; select and play music for exercise; executable instructions to display, store, and transmit athletic data.

with touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , optical sensor(s) 164 , optical sensor controller 158 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 and image management module 144 . , the camera module 143 captures still images or video (including a video stream) and stores them in the memory 102 , modifies the characteristics of the still image or video, executable instructions to delete the video.

Along with the touch screen 112 , the display controller 156 , the contact/motion module 130 , the graphics module 132 , the text input module 134 , and the camera module 143 , the image management module 144 is configured to perform static and and/or executable instructions for arranging, modifying (eg, editing), or otherwise manipulating, labeling, deleting, presenting (eg, in a digital slide show or album), and storing video images .

Along with RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 and text input module 134 , browser module 147 is configured to: executable instructions to browse the Internet according to user instructions, including retrieving, linking to, receiving, and displaying files or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages include those

RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , email client module 140 , and browser module ( In conjunction with 147 , calendar module 148 is executable to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (eg, calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) according to user instructions. contains commands.

Widget modules, along with RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 and browser module 147 . 149 is optionally downloaded and used by the user (eg, weather widget 149-1, stock widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4 and dictionary widget 149-5), or mini-applications created by the user (eg, user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, the widget includes a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an Extensible Markup Language (XML) file and a JavaScript file (eg, Yahoo! widgets).

A widget generator module, along with RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 and browser module 147 . 150 is optionally used by the user to create widgets (eg, change a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

With touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , and text input module 134 , search module 151 is configured to perform one or more search criteria according to user instructions. executable instructions to search text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match fields (eg, one or more user-specific search terms).

With touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , RF circuitry 108 and browser module 147 . , the video and music player module 152 provides executable instructions that enable a user to download and play recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and videos ( executable instructions to display, show, or otherwise play back (eg, on a touch screen 112 or on an externally connected display through an external port 124 ). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

Along with the touch screen 112 , the display controller 156 , the contact/motion module 130 , the graphics module 132 and the text input module 134 , the memo module 153 is configured to take notes, to do, according to user instructions. executable instructions to create and manage to-do lists and the like.

RF circuitry 108 , touch screen 112 , display controller 156 , contact/motion module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , GPS module 135 , and browser module 147 . ), the map module 154 may optionally provide maps and data associated with the maps according to user instructions (eg, driving directions; data regarding shops and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) to receive, display, modify, and store.

Touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, Along with the email client module 140 and browser module 147 , the online video module 155 allows a user to access, browse, (eg, streaming and receive (by download), play (eg, on a touch screen or on an externally connected display via external port 124 ), send an email with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage contains commands to In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141 rather than email client module 140 is used to send a link to a particular online video. For further description of online video applications, see U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 60/936,562, "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," filed June 20, 2007, and December 31, 2007. may be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/968,067, filed on the date of "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos," the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. .

Each of the modules and applications identified above includes executable instructions for performing one or more of the functions described above and the methods described herein (eg, the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). corresponding to a set of These modules (eg, sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, so various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. . For example, a video player module is optionally combined with a music player module into a single module (eg, video and music player module 152 in FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. In addition, the memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

In some embodiments, device 100 is a device in which operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively via a touch screen and/or touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, etc.) on device 100 is selectively reduced.

The predefined set of functions performed entirely via the touch screen and/or touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by a user, navigates device 100 from any user interface displayed on device 100 to a main, home, or root menu. In these embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory (102 in FIG. 1A or 370 in FIG. 3 ) includes event classifier 170 (eg, in operating system 126 ) and each application 136 - 1 (eg, application described above). (any of 137-151, 155, 380-390).

The event classifier 170 receives the event information, and determines an application 136 - 1 to which the event information is to be delivered, and an application view 191 of the application 136 - 1 . The event sorter 170 includes an event monitor 171 and an event dispatcher module 174 . In some embodiments, application 136 - 1 includes an application internal state 192 representing the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or running. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which application(s) is currently active, and application internal state 192 is sent to event classifier 170 . It is used to determine the application views 191 to which the event information is to be delivered.

In some embodiments, application internal state 192 is a user indicating resume information to be used when application 136 - 1 resumes execution, information being displayed by application 136 - 1 or ready to be displayed. Interface state information, a state queue to enable the user to return to a previous state or view of the application 136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. Include additional information, such as one or more.

The event monitor 171 receives event information from the peripheral interface 118 . The event information includes information about a subevent (eg, a user touch on the touch-sensitive display 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripheral interface 118 is from I/O subsystem 106 or sensors, such as proximity sensor 166 , accelerometer(s) 168 , and/or microphone 113 (via audio circuitry 110 ). Sends received information. Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, the peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (eg, receiving input exceeding a predetermined noise threshold and/or input for exceeding a predetermined duration). .

In some embodiments, the event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .

Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a subevent occurred within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view. Views consist of controls and other elements that the user can see on the display.

Another aspect of a user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of each application) for which touch is detected optionally correspond to program levels in the application's program or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest-level view in which a touch is detected is optionally referred to as a hit view, and the set of events recognized as appropriate inputs is, optionally, based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that initiates the touch-based gesture. it is decided

The hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of the touch-based gesture. If the application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, the hit view determination module 172 identifies the hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy that should handle the subevent. In most situations, the hit view is the lowest level view in which the initiated subevent occurs (eg, the first subevent in the sequence of subevents forming the event or potential event). Once a hit view is identified by hit view determination module 172 , the hit view typically receives all subevents related to the same touch or input source that caused it to be identified as a hit view.

The active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of subevents. In some embodiments, the active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of subevents. In other embodiments, the active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views containing the physical location of the subevent are actively involved views, so that all actively involved views are specific to the subevents. It decides that it should receive the sequence. In other embodiments, even if the touch subevents are exclusively confined to an area associated with one particular view, the top views in the hierarchy will still remain as actively engaged views.

The event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to an event recognizer (eg, event recognizer 180 ). In embodiments that include an active event recognizer determination module 173 , the event dispatcher module 174 communicates event information to the event recognizer determined by the active event recognizer determination module 173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores event information in an event queue, which event information is fetched by each event receiver 182 .

In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event classifier 170 . Alternatively, application 136 - 1 includes event classifier 170 . In still other embodiments, event classifier 170 is a standalone module or is part of another module stored in memory 102 , such as contact/motion module 130 .

In some embodiments, application 136 - 1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191 , each of which is a touch event occurring within a respective view of the application's user interface. Includes instructions for processing them. Each application view 191 of application 136 - 1 includes one or more event recognizers 180 . Typically, each application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180 . In other embodiments, one or more of the event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit or higher-level object from which the application 136 - 1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, each event handler 190 is one of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , GUI updater 178 , and/or event data 179 received from event classifier 170 . includes more than Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 , object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update application internal state 192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included within each application view 191 .

Each event recognizer 180 receives event information (eg, event data 179 ) from the event classifier 170 and identifies an event from the event information. The event recognizer 180 includes an event receiver 182 and an event comparator 184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of metadata 183 and event delivery instructions 188 (optionally including subevent delivery instructions).

The event receiver 182 receives event information from the event classifier 170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information such as the location of the sub-event. If the sub-event relates to motion of the touch, the event information also optionally includes the speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (eg, from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information is the current orientation of the device (also referred to as device orientation). ) and corresponding information about

The event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions, and based on the comparison, determines an event or subevent, or determines or updates the status of the event or subevent. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186 . Event definitions 186 include definitions of events (eg, predefined sequences of sub-events), eg, Event 1 187-1, Event 2 187-2, and the like. In some embodiments, subevents within event 187 include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multi-touch. In one example, the definition for event 1 187-1 is a double tap on the displayed object. A double tap is, for example, a first touch (touch start) on a displayed object during a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) during a predetermined phase, a displayed object during a predetermined phase a second touch on the upper body (touch start), and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 187 - 2 is dragging on the displayed object. Dragging includes, for example, a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, movement of the touch across the touch-sensitive display 112 , and liftoff of the touch (touch termination). In some embodiments, the event also includes information about one or more associated event handlers 190 .

In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for each user interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user interface object is associated with a subevent. For example, in an application view in which three user interface objects are displayed on the touch-sensitive display 112 , when a touch is detected on the touch-sensitive display 112 , the event comparator 184 displays the three user interface objects A hit test is performed to determine which of these is associated with a touch (subevent). When each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the object and subevent that triggers the hit test.

In some embodiments, the definition for each event 187 also includes deferred actions of delaying the delivery of event information until after it is determined whether the sequence of subevents corresponds or does not correspond to an event type of the event recognizer. .

If each event recognizer 180 determines that the set of sub-events does not match any of the events in event definitions 186 , each event recognizer 180 determines whether an event is impossible, event failed, or An event end state is entered, after which each event recognizer ignores subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers that remain active for the hit view, if any, continue to track and process sub-events of the touch-based gesture in progress.

In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 includes configurable attributes, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform subevent delivery to actively participating event recognizers. and metadata 183 with In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact with, or come to interact with, each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether subevents are delivered to various levels in the view or program hierarchy.

In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the event when one or more specific subevents of the event are recognized. In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 passes event information associated with the event to an event handler 190 . Activating the event handler 190 is separate from sending (and delayed sending) subevents to each hit view. In some embodiments, the event recognizer 180 sends a flag associated with the recognized event, and the event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include subevent delivery instructions that deliver event information about a subevent without activating an event handler. Instead, subevent delivery instructions pass event information to event handlers associated with a series of subevents or to actively engaged views. Event handlers associated with a series of subevents or actively engaged views receive event information and perform a predetermined process.

In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136 - 1 . For example, the data updater 176 updates a phone number used in the contacts module 137 or stores a video file used in the video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136 - 1 . For example, the object updater 177 creates a new user interface object or updates the location of the user interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, the GUI updater 178 prepares display information for display on the touch-sensitive display and sends it to the graphics module 132 .

In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or accesses data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 . In some embodiments, data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included within a single module of each application 136 - 1 or application view 191 . In other embodiments, they are included within two or more software modules.

The discussion above regarding event handling of user touches on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user inputs for operating multifunction devices 100 having input devices, but all of which are disclosed on touch screens. You have to understand that it is not. mouse movement and mouse button presses optionally coordinated with, for example, single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements, such as tap, drag, scroll, etc., on the touchpad; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; verbal commands; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof is optionally used as inputs corresponding to subevents defining the event to be recognized.

2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch screen 112 , in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen, optionally, displays one or more graphics within the user interface (UI) 200 . In this embodiment, as well as other embodiments described below, the user may, for example, use one or more fingers 202 (not to scale in the figures) or one or more styluses 203 (in the figures to scale). It becomes possible to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphic using (not shown). In some embodiments, selection of the one or more graphics occurs when the user ceases to contact the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture may optionally include one or more taps of a finger in contact with device 100 , one or more swipes (left to right, right to left, up and/or down). and/or rolling (right to left, left to right, up and/or down). In some implementations or situations, if inadvertently contacted with a graphic, the graphic is not selected. For example, when the gesture corresponding to the selection is a tap, the swipe gesture to sweep over the application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more physical buttons, such as a “home” or menu button 204 . As described above, the menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in the set of applications that are selectively executed on the device 100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in the GUI displayed on the touch screen 112 .

In some embodiments, device 100 includes touch screen 112 , menu button 204 , push button 206 to power on/off the device and lock the device, volume control button(s) 208 , a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210 , a headset jack 212 , and a docking/charging external port 124 . Push button 206 optionally powers on/off the device by pressing the button and holding the button depressed for a predefined time interval; lock the device by pressing the button and releasing the button before a predefined time interval elapses; Used to unlock a device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions via microphone 113 . Device 100 may also, optionally, generate tactile outputs for a user of device 100 and/or one or more contact intensity sensors 165 to detect intensity of contacts on touch screen 112 . one or more tactile output generators 167 for

3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, desktop computer, tablet computer, multimedia player device, navigation device, educational device (such as a children's learning toy), gaming system, or control device (eg, home or industrial). controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310 , one or more network or other communication interfaces 360 , memory 370 , and one or more communication buses to interconnect these components ( 320). Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes referred to as a chipset) that interconnects system components and controls communication between them. Device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 that includes a display 340 that is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 may also, optionally, a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , a tactile output for generating tactile outputs on device 300 . Generator 357 (eg, similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), and sensors 359 (eg, light sensor, acceleration sensor, proximity sensor, touch sensitive) sensor, and/or a contact intensity sensor similar to the contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A . memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; optionally including non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from CPU(s) 310 . In some embodiments, memory 370 includes programs, modules, and data structures similar to programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ). , or a subset thereof. In addition, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 . For example, memory 370 of device 300 may optionally include drawing module 380 , presentation module 382 , word processing module 384 , website creation module 386 , and disk authoring module 388 . ), and/or spreadsheet module 390 , while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ), optionally, does not store these modules.

Each of the previously identified elements in FIG. 3 is optionally stored in one or more of the aforementioned memory devices. Each of the modules identified above corresponds to a set of instructions for performing the functions described above. The modules or programs (eg, sets of instructions) identified above need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules may be selectively combined in various embodiments in various embodiments. or otherwise rearranged. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Also, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

Attention is now directed to embodiments of user interfaces that are optionally implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100 .

4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are optionally implemented on device 300 . In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

셀룰러 및 Wi-Fi 신호들과 같은 무선 통신(들)을 위한 신호 세기 표시자(들)(402);

signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

시간(404);

time 404;

블루투스 표시자(405);

Bluetooth indicator 405;

배터리 상태 표시자(406);

battery status indicator 406 ;

다음과 같은, 빈번하게 사용되는 애플리케이션들에 대한 아이콘들을 갖는 트레이(408):

Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:

o Icon 416 for phone module 138 labeled “Call”, optionally including an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

o Icon 418 for email client module 140 labeled "Mail", optionally including an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;

o icon 420 for browser module 147 labeled "Browser"; and

o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152 labeled "iPod", also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152; and

다음과 같은, 다른 애플리케이션들에 대한 아이콘들:

Icons for different applications, such as:

o Icon 424 for IM module 141 labeled "Message";

o Icon 426 for calendar module 148 labeled “Calendar”;

o Icon 428 for image management module 144 labeled “Photos”;

o Icon 430 for camera module 143 labeled “Camera”;

o Icon 432 for online video module 155 labeled “Online Video”;

o Icon 434 for stock widget 149-2 labeled "Stocks";

o Icon 436 for map module 154 labeled “Map”;

o icon 438 for weather widget 149-1 labeled “weather”;

o Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4 labeled "Clock";

o Icon 442 for workout support module 142 labeled “Workout Support”;

o icon 444 for notes module 153 labeled “Notes”; and

o Icon 446 for the Settings application or module, labeled “Settings”, providing access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136 .

It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely examples. For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player”. Other labels are optionally used for various application icons. In some embodiments, the label for each application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to each application icon. In some embodiments, the label for a particular application icon is separate from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.

4B illustrates a device (eg, in FIG. 3 ) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (eg, tablet or touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 ) separate from display 450 (eg, touch screen display 112 ). An example user interface on device 300 is shown. Device 300 may also optionally include one or more contact intensity sensors (eg, one or more of sensors 359 ) and/or device 300 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 . ) one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for the user of

Although some of the examples that follow will be provided with reference to inputs on a touch screen display 112 (a touch-sensitive surface and display combined), in some embodiments, the device is separate from the display as shown in FIG. 4B . Detect inputs on a personal touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in FIG. 4B ) has a major axis (eg, 452 in FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a major axis (eg, 453 in FIG. 4B ) on the display (eg, 450 ). According to these embodiments, the device communicates with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at positions corresponding to respective positions on the display (eg, in FIG. 4B , 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 ). Detect contacts (eg, 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B ). In this way, user inputs (eg, contacts 460 , 462 and their movements) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in FIG. 4B ) can be detected when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. used to manipulate the user interface on the display (eg, 450 in FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device by the device when . It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used with other user interfaces described herein.

Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (eg, finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are other input device It should be understood that input from (eg, mouse-based input or stylus input) is replaced. For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click (eg, instead of a contact) and subsequent movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (eg, instead of movement of the contact). As another example, the tap gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is positioned over the location of the tap gesture (eg, instead of ceasing to detect the contact following detection of the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are selectively used simultaneously, or mouse and finger contacts are selectively used concurrently.

5A shows an example personal electronic device 500 . Device 500 includes a body 502 . In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 , 300 (eg, FIGS. 1A-4B ). In some embodiments, device 500 has a touch-sensitive display screen 504 (hereinafter, touch screen 504 ). Alternatively or in addition to the touch screen 504 , the device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. Like devices 100 and 300 , in some embodiments touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) is, optionally, one for detecting the intensity of applied contacts (eg, touches). and more than an intensity sensor. One or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) may provide output data representing the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 500 may respond to touches based on the intensity of the touches, meaning that touches of different intensities may invoke different user interface actions on device 500 .

Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are described, for example, in Related Applications: filed May 8, 2013 and entitled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application," International Patent Application No. PCT/US2013/040061 (published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849), and filed on November 11, 2013 and entitled "Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface" for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships," International Patent Application No. PCT/US2013/069483 (published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2014/105276), each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 , 508 . Input mechanisms 506 and 508 (if included) may be physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. These attachment mechanisms (if included) allow device 500 to use, for example, hats, glasses, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch bands, chains, pants, belts, shoes, wallets. , so that it can be attached to a backpack, etc. These attachment mechanisms allow device 500 to be worn by a user.

5B shows an example personal electronic device 500 . In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1A , 1B , and 3 . Device 500 has a bus 512 that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518 . The I/O section 514 may be coupled to a display 504 , which may have a touch-sensitive component 522 , and, optionally, an intensity sensor 524 (eg, a contact intensity sensor). I/O section 514 also provides communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. can be connected with Device 500 may include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508 . The input mechanism 506 is optionally a rotatable input device or, for example, a depressible and rotatable input device. In some examples, the input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button.

In some examples, the input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a microphone. The personal electronic device 500 may optionally include a GPS sensor 532 , an accelerometer 534 , a direction sensor 540 (eg, a compass), a gyroscope 536 , a motion sensor 538 , and/or their It includes various sensors, such as combinations, all of which may be operatively connected to the I/O section 514 .

The memory 518 of the personal electronic device 500 may include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage media for storing computer-executable instructions, which are transmitted to the one or more computer processors 516 . When executed by, for example, causes computer processors to: The techniques described below can be performed. A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. Non-transitory computer-readable storage media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storage. Examples of such storage include persistent solid state memory such as flash, solid state drives, etc., as well as magnetic disks, optical disks based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies. The personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B , and may include other or additional components in a number of configurations.

As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user interaction selectively displayed on the display screen of devices 100 , 300 , and/or 500 ( FIGS. 1A , 3 , and 5A and 5B ). Refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object. For example, each of an image (eg, an icon), a button, and text (eg, a hyperlink) optionally constitutes an affordance.

As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that represents the current portion of a user interface with which the user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, a touch-sensitive surface (eg, FIG. 3 ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (eg, a button, window, slider, or other user interface element) When an input (eg, a press input) is detected on the touchpad 355 of the or touch-sensitive surface 451 of FIG. 4B ), the cursor becomes a "focus selector" such that a particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. function as Some implementations include a touch screen display (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 of FIG. 1A or touch screen 112 of FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display. In some cases, a particular user interface element is detected when an input (eg, a touch input) is detected on a touch screen display at the location of a particular user interface element (eg, a button, window, slider, or other user interface element). A contact detected on the touch screen functions as a “focus selector” to be adjusted according to the entered input. In some implementations, focus is moved to one of the user interfaces without movement of a corresponding cursor or contact or movement of a corresponding cursor on the touch screen display (eg, by using a tab key or an arrow key to move focus from one button to another). moved from one area of the user interface to another area of the user interface; In such implementations, the focus selector moves in response to movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Irrespective of the particular form the focus selector has, the focus selector is generally used by the user to convey the user's intended interaction with the user interface (eg, by indicating to the device an element of the user interface with which the user wants to interact). A user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) controlled by For example, the position of a focus selector (eg, cursor, contact, or selection box) over each button while a press input is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touchpad or touch screen) (eg, on the device's display) It will indicate that the user is about to activate the respective button (unlike the other user interface elements shown).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a property of a contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the feature intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is optionally determined by a predefined number of intensity samples, or (eg, after detecting the contact, before detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting the start of movement of the contact, A predetermined period of time for a predefined event (eg, before detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in the intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact) 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds). The characteristic intensity of the contact is, optionally, a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile of the intensities of the contact. value), a value of half the maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a value of 90 percent of the maximum value of the intensities of the contact, and the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used to determine the feature intensity (eg, when the feature intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action was performed by the user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, as a result of a contact having a characteristic intensity that does not exceed a first threshold, a first action is performed, and as a result of a contact having a characteristic intensity that exceeds a first intensity threshold but does not exceed a second intensity threshold, a second An action is performed, and as a result of the contact having a characteristic intensity above the second threshold, a third action is performed. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic strength and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether to perform one or more actions (eg, perform each action, rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first action or a second action). to decide whether or not to hold off performing each action).

5C illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts 552A-552E on the touch-sensitive display screen 504 using a plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D. 5C further includes intensity diagrams showing current intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524A-524D for intensity units. In this example, the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524A, 524D are each 9 intensity units, and the intensity measurements of intensity sensors 524B, 524C are each seven intensity units. In some implementations, the total intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of the plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D, which in this example is 32 intensity units. In some embodiments, each contact is assigned a respective intensity that is a fraction of the total intensity. 5D illustrates assigning a total intensity to contacts 552A-552E based on their respective distances from center of force 554 . In this example, contacts 552A, 552B, 552E are each assigned an intensity of the contact of 8 intensity units of the total intensity, and contacts 552C and 552D are each assigned an intensity of the contact of 4 intensity units of the total intensity, respectively. is allocated More generally, in some implementations, each contact j is assigned a respective intensity Ij that is a fraction of the total intensity A according to a predefined mathematical function Ij = A·(Dj/ΣDi). , where Dj is the distance of each contact j to the center of force, and ΣDi is the sum of the distances of all individual contacts to the center of force (eg, i=1 to the last). Operations described with reference to FIGS. 5C and 5D may be performed using an electronic device similar to or identical to device 100 , 300 , or 500 . In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of the contact is based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, intensity sensors are used to determine a single feature intensity (eg, a single feature intensity of a single contact). It should be noted that the intensity diagrams are not part of the displayed user interface and are included in FIGS. 5C and 5D to aid the reader.

In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified to determine a characteristic strength. For example, the touch-sensitive surface receives successive swipe contacts, optionally transitioning from the starting position to reach the ending position, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is optionally based on only a portion of the successive swipe contacts (eg, only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location) rather than the entire swipe contact. In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is optionally applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm may optionally be one of an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. contains more than one. In some situations, these smoothing algorithms remove narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact to determine the characteristic intensity.

The intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface is optionally characterized for one or more intensity thresholds, such as a touch-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button or trackpad of a physical mouse. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from those typically associated with clicking a button or trackpad of a physical mouse. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity that is below the light press intensity threshold (eg, and above the nominal contact detection intensity threshold, below which the contact is no longer detected), the device It will move the focus selector according to movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an action associated with the threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. In general, unless stated otherwise, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface drawings.

An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the touch detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the touch detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting a contact on a touch surface. A decrease in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch surface. In some embodiments, the touch detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.

In some embodiments described herein, the one or more actions detect each press input performed with each contact (or plurality of contacts) or in response to detecting a gesture comprising the respective press input. and wherein each press input is detected based, at least in part, on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, each action is performed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of each contact above a press input intensity threshold (eg, a “down stroke” of each press input). In some embodiments, the press input comprises an increase in the intensity of each contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, each action being each below the press input intensity threshold is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact (eg, an “up stroke” of each press input).

5E-5H illustrate contact 562 from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold (eg, “IT _L ”) of FIG. 5E to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold (eg, “IT _{D ”) of FIG. 5H .} Depicts detection of a gesture comprising a press input corresponding to an increase in intensity. On the displayed user interface 570 that includes application icons 572A-572D displayed in a predefined area 574, while the cursor 576 is displayed over the application icon 572B corresponding to App 2, A gesture performed using contact 562 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 560 . In some embodiments, the gesture is detected on the touch-sensitive display 504 . Intensity sensors detect the intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 560 . The device determines that the intensity of the contact 562 has peaked above a _{deep press intensity threshold (eg, “IT D ”).} Contact 562 is maintained on touch-sensitive surface 560 . In response to detection of the gesture, and _{according to contact 562 having an intensity that exceeds a deep press intensity threshold (eg, "IT D} ") during the gesture, reduced scale representations of recently opened documents for App 2 ( 578A-578C (eg, thumbnails) are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5H . In some embodiments, the intensity compared to one or more intensity thresholds is a characteristic intensity of the contact. It should be noted that the intensity diagram for contact 562 is not part of the displayed user interface and is included in FIGS. 5E-5H to aid the reader.

In some embodiments, the display of representations 578A-578C includes an animation. For example, as shown in FIG. 5F , representation 578A is initially displayed proximate to application icon 572B. As the animation progresses, representation 578A moves up and representation 578B is displayed proximate to application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5G . Then, as shown in FIG. 5H , representation 578A moves up, representation 578B moves up toward representation 578A, and representation 578C is displayed proximate to application icon 572B. Representations 578A-578C form an array over icon 572B. In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 5F and 5G , the animation progresses according to the intensity of contact 562 , wherein the intensity of contact 562 exceeds a deep press intensity threshold (eg, “IT _D ”). Representations 578A-578C appear and move upward as they increase towards. In some embodiments, the intensity on which the progress of the animation is based is a characteristic intensity of the contact. The operations described with reference to FIGS. 5E-5H may be performed using an electronic device similar to or identical to device 100 , 300 , or 500 .

In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs, sometimes referred to as "jitter", where the device has a hysteresis intensity threshold ( For example, the hysteresis intensity threshold is an X intensity unit lower than the press input intensity threshold, or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some suitable percentage of the press input intensity threshold). As such, in some embodiments, the press input comprises an increase in the intensity of each contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold, each The operation of is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in the intensity of each contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold (eg, an “up stroke” of each press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input causes the device to increase the intensity of the contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, and optionally, to an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold. It is detected only if a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact is detected, and each operation is performed in response to detecting a press input (eg, an increase in the intensity of the contact or a decrease in the intensity of the contact depending on the environment).

For convenience of description, descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture comprising a press input include, optionally, an increase in an intensity of a contact above a press input intensity threshold, a hysteresis intensity threshold An increase in the intensity of the contact from an intensity below the press input intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, and/or an intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold. Triggered in response to detecting either of the reductions. Further, in examples where the action is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, the action is, optionally, less than a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to and lower than the press input intensity threshold. is performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact.

5I illustrates an example electronic device 580 . Device 580 includes a body 580A. In some embodiments, device 580 may include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 , 300 , 500 (eg, FIGS. 1A-5B ). In some embodiments, device 580 includes one or more speakers 580B (concealed within body 580A), one or more microphones 580C, one or more touch-sensitive surfaces 580D, and one or more Displays 580E. Alternatively or in addition to the display and touch-sensitive surface 580D, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also referred to as a touchscreen). Like devices 100 , 300 , and 500 , in some embodiments, touch-sensitive surface 580D (or touch screen) is optionally configured to detect the intensity of contacts (eg, touches) being applied. one or more intensity sensors. One or more intensity sensors of touch-sensitive surface 580D (or touchscreen) may provide output data representing the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 580 may respond to touches based on the intensity of the touches, meaning that touches of different intensities may invoke different user interface actions on device 580 . In some embodiments, the one or more displays 580E are one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs). For example, the display may be a single LED, a cluster of LEDs (eg, red, green, and blue LEDs), a plurality of individual LEDs, a plurality of individual LED clusters, or other arrangement of one or more LEDs. For example, display 580E may be an array of nine individual LED clusters arranged in a circular shape (eg, a ring). In some examples, one or more displays are comprised of one or more different types of light emitting elements.

5J shows an example personal electronic device 580 . In some embodiments, device 580 may include some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1A , 1B , 3 , 5A, and 5B . Device 580 has a bus 592 that operatively couples I/O section 594 with one or more computer processors 596 and memory 598 . I/O section 594 may be coupled to a display 582 , which may have a touch-sensitive component 584 , and, optionally, an intensity sensor 585 (eg, a contact intensity sensor). In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive component 584 is a separate component from the display 582 . I/O section 594 also provides communication unit 590 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. can be connected with Device 580 may include input mechanisms 588 . In some examples, the input mechanism 588 is, optionally, a button. In some examples, the input mechanism 588 is, optionally, a microphone. The input mechanism 588 is, optionally, a plurality of microphones (eg, a microphone array).

The electronic device 580 includes a speaker 586 for outputting audio. Device 580 may include audio circuitry (eg, I/O section 594 ) that receives audio data, converts the audio data to electrical signals, and transmits electrical signals to speaker 586 . The speaker 586 converts the electrical signal into human audible sound waves. Audio circuitry (eg, within I/O section 594 ) also receives electrical signals converted by a microphone (eg, input mechanism 588 ) from sound waves. Audio circuitry (eg, within I/O section 594 ) converts electrical signals into audio data. Audio data is optionally fetched from and/or transmitted to memory 598 and/or RF circuitry (eg, within communication unit 590 ) by I/O section 594 .

The memory 598 of the personal electronic device 580 may include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage media for storing computer-executable instructions, which are transmitted to the one or more computer processors 596 . When executed by, for example, causes computer processors to: The techniques described below can be performed. A computer-readable storage medium can be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. Non-transitory computer-readable storage media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic, optical, and/or semiconductor storage. Examples of such storage include persistent solid state memory such as flash, solid state drives, etc., as well as magnetic disks, optical disks based on CD, DVD, or Blu-ray technologies. Personal electronic device 580 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5J , and may include other or additional components in a number of configurations.

Attention is now directed to embodiments of user interfaces (“UIs”) and associated processes implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 , device 300 , or device 500 .

6 includes a diagram 600 illustrating an example set of devices and a physical structure, in accordance with some embodiments. 6 is used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIGS. 8A, 8B, 10, and 12 .

Diagram 600 includes a house 602 , and a set of devices (eg, device 646 , device 604 , etc.). The house 602 includes a number of rooms, for example, a kitchen 602a, a dining room 602b, a bedroom 602c, a living room 602d, and a solarium 602e. Kitchen 602a is in the upper left portion of house 602, and dining room 602b is between kitchen 602a and bedroom 602c, where bedroom 602c is to the right of dining room 602b. Kitchen 602a and dining room 602b have no walls between them, whereas dining room 602b and bedroom 602c have walls between them. The living room 602d is in the bottom left portion of the house 602 , and the solarium 602e is in the bottom right portion of the house 602 . In some embodiments, house 602 includes rooms other than those shown in FIG. 6 and/or excludes rooms shown in FIG. 6 . Although diagram 600 depicts a house, it is to be understood that this is by way of example only, and that the techniques described herein may work for other types of physical structures, such as office buildings, hotels, apartments, and the like.

As illustrated in FIG. 6 , each room in the house 602 has at least one device. However, in some embodiments, a room in house 602 does not have devices.

As illustrated in FIG. 6 , John's phone 604 is placed in kitchen 602a, on the counter between the stove and the sink. In the dining room 602b, the dining room speaker 616 is seated on the dining room table. In bedroom 602c, personal tablet 634 is placed on the bed, bedroom speaker 636 is seated on a nightstand adjacent to the bed, and bedroom light 632 is on the opposite side of the bed. is located In living room 602d, living room speaker 646 and living room speaker 648 are on opposite sides of the television, and living room lamp 642 is located in front of the television screen. In the solarium 602e, the solarium speaker 656 and the solarium speaker 658 are located on opposite sides of the room.

As illustrated in FIG. 6 , computer device 674 and Jane's phone 684 are outside home 602 . computer device 674 is located in the dashboard of the car at a distance 670 from home 602; Jane's phone 684 is a distance 680 from home 602 and is currently in Jane's possession. In some embodiments, computer device 674 is connected to an electronic device, such as a cellular phone (eg, a personal phone similar to John's phone 604 and/or Jane's phone 684), wherein the electronic device is a computer device Provide instructions to the computer device 674 that cause 674 to display visual content. Distances 670 and 680 are greater than a threshold distance (eg, 1, 5, 10 meters) from the house, such that computer device 674 and Jane's phone 684 are at locations corresponding to home 602 . not be considered to be present (eg, not within the home's geofence, or connected to a wireless network associated with (eg, established within) home 602 ).

In this example, the speakers shown in FIG. 6 (e.g., dining room speaker 616, bedroom speaker 636, living room speaker 646, living room speaker 648, solarium speaker 656, and solarium speaker (e.g., dining room speaker 616) 658)), lights (e.g., bedroom light 632 and living room lamp 642), and personal devices (e.g., John's phone 604, tablet 634, computer device 674, and Jane's Phone 684 ) is assigned to home 602 (eg, by a user account associated with home 602 , such as John's user account or Jane's user account, to a group corresponding to home) programmatically. mapped to ).

In addition, each individual speaker and light is also assigned to the room in which it is located (eg, mapped to a group corresponding to the room). For example, restaurant speaker 616 is assigned to restaurant 602b (eg, programmatically mapped to a group corresponding to restaurant); bedroom speaker 636 and bedroom light 632 are assigned to bedroom 602c; The living room lamp 642 , the living room speaker 646 and the living room speaker 648 are assigned to the living room 602d; A solarium speaker 656 and a solarium speaker 658 are assigned to the solarium 602e. In some embodiments, each group corresponding to each room is also assigned to a house 602 . Accordingly, devices that are mapped to a room in the house 602 are also simultaneously mapped to the house 602 .

An external device cannot be assigned to two different groups of devices corresponding to different rooms. For example, the dining room speaker 616 cannot be assigned to the kitchen 602a (eg, a group corresponding to the kitchen 602a) and the dining room 602b at the same time. However, two groups of devices each assigned to their respective rooms may be mapped to the (same) zone. In this example, entertainment zone 660 is assigned to living room 602d in FIG. 6 and solarium 602e in FIG. 6 . In this example, entertainment zone 660 is not a physical room within home 602c; The entertainment zone is defined programmatically as being assigned to the solarium living room 602d and the solarium 602e. In some embodiments, two different zones share a group of devices (eg, include some overlapping devices, each including some non-overlapping devices). For example, if a group of devices assigned to solarium 602e is assigned to entertainment area 660 and a dining area (eg, a group of devices for which dining areas are assigned to restaurant 602b and solarium 602e) ) can be mapped to

In this example, personal devices (eg, John's phone 604, tablet 634, and Jane's phone 684) are not programmatically mapped to a group corresponding to a room, but only to a group corresponding to home. mapped.

In some embodiments, the speakers, lights, and personal devices (eg, John's phone 604 , tablet 634 , Jane's phone 684 ) shown in FIG. 6 are directly connected to each other or one Smart devices that are indirectly connected to each other through the above networks (eg, wireless networks (eg, Bluetooth, NFC, Wi-Fi, 4G, etc.)). In some embodiments, other smart devices, such as smart appliances, smart thermostats, smart plug outlets, etc., are connected to one or more networks. In some embodiments, the one or more personal devices may also include other types of personal devices, such as smartwatches, laptops, desktops, and the like.

7A-7A illustrate example electronic devices and user interfaces for transmitting an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including those of FIGS. 8A and 8B .

7A illustrates an electronic device 700 displaying a user interface 702 . In FIG. 7A , electronic device 700 is a portable multifunction device and has one or more components described above with respect to one or more of devices 100 , 200 , 300 , 500 . With reference to the figures below, in some embodiments, device 700 is operating at a location less than a predetermined distance from home 602 ; In other embodiments, device 700 is operating at a location that is more than a predetermined distance from home 602 . In some embodiments, device 700 is connected to a network (eg, a wireless network) associated with home 602 such that at least one of the devices (eg, speakers, lights) located within home 602 is The device 700 is connected to the same wireless network to which it is connected. In some embodiments, more than one wireless network is associated with home 602 . In some embodiments, device 700 is connected to at least one of these networks. In some embodiments, device 700 is not connected to one or more networks associated with home 602 . Thus, device 700 is capable of transmitting audio multicast messages and communicating with devices within home 602, regardless of how far the device 700 is from home 602 or the network to which device 700 is connected. can

Although this description often refers to messages as multicast messages (or audio multicast messages), such messages optionally include (1) multicast communication, (2) broadcast communication, (3) unicast communication, ( 4) or any combination thereof (eg, (1) a first device (eg, a controller) transmits a unicast communication to a second device (eg, a hub in the home), and (2) the second device multicasts or transmit a broadcast communication (eg, including content from a unicast communication) to one or more third-party devices (eg, one or more accessory devices and/or one or more personal devices in the home) It should be recognized that it is transmitted. In some embodiments, a multicast communication is a communication sent to multiple recipients. In some embodiments, a broadcast communication is a communication sent to devices on a channel or network. In some embodiments, a broadcast communication is a communication sent to all devices on a channel or network. In some embodiments, a unicast communication is a communication sent to a single recipient. In such embodiments, multiple unicast communications are transmitted when content needs to be transmitted to multiple devices.

In some embodiments, a broadcast communication is a communication sent to all devices on a channel or network. In such embodiments, multiple unicast communications are transmitted when content needs to be transmitted to multiple devices.

As illustrated in FIG. 7A , the user interface 702 includes application icons 704 , such as a home application icon 704a . Each of the application icons 704 corresponds to an application, such that when the application icon is selected, such selection will cause the device 700 to display the respective application's user interface. For example, the home application icon 704a corresponds to the home application. In FIG. 7A , device 700 detects a tap gesture 750a (eg, selection) at a location corresponding to home application icon 704a .

7B , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750a , the device 700 displays the user interface 710 of the home application. The user interface 710 is a user interface for controlling a plurality of external devices allocated to the house 602 . The user interface 710 includes a home location identifier 712 , status information 714 , macro controls 716 , external device controls 718 , navigation controls 722 , home multicast commands 724 , and a home multicast affordance 726 (eg, a selectable user interface object).

The house location identifier 712 is a name corresponding to the house 602 . In this example, the location identifier is part of the address of home 602 (eg, “123 Main Street”). In some embodiments, the location identifier is a pseudonym, such as the alias assigned to the house. In some embodiments, the pseudonym is a system generated pseudonym. In some embodiments, the pseudonym is a user generated pseudonym. In some embodiments, the location identifier is set by a user of device 700 or an external device. In some embodiments, the location identifier is a graphical user interface object, such as an image.

The status information 714 includes information about the current status of some of the devices assigned to the house 602 . Here, the state information 714 indicates that at least one light is turned on in the house 602 . In some embodiments, status information 714 includes information about the status of multiple devices (eg, “bedroom fan on”).

As illustrated in FIG. 7B , below the home location identifier 712 and status information 714 are two rows of macro controls 716 . Macro controls 716 are affordances (eg, selectable user interface objects) for initiating a respective macro. In some embodiments, each macro causes one or more external devices to perform an action. For example, a "Good Night" macro control, when selected, causes one or more lights to turn off, one or more speakers to stop playing media, and/or one or more deadbolt locks to lock. .

Additionally, in FIG. 7B , user interface 710 includes rows for external device controls 718 below macro controls 716 . In FIG. 7B , two rows of external device controls 718 extend across three columns, so a total of six are displayed (eg, where three device controls are on each respective row). In some embodiments, the user may have fewer external devices to control, requiring fewer external device controls 718 . In other embodiments, the user may have more external devices to control, requiring more external device controls 718 . In some embodiments, when there are more external device controls 718 to display than available screen space, the screen scrolls (eg, up and down or left and right) to display all external device controls. The external device control units 718 include the dining room speaker control unit 718a, the living room lamp control unit 718b, the living room speakers control unit 718c, the solarium speakers control unit 718d, the bedroom speaker control unit 718e, and the bedroom lighting control unit. (718f). Additionally, each of the external device control units 718 includes state information indicating the current state of each respective external device. For example, the status information for the dining room speaker control 718a indicates that the dining room speaker 616 is currently playing media (which is not represented by status information 714 in this example), and the living room lamp control ( Status information for 718b) indicates that living room lamp 642 is currently off (this is represented by status information 714 in this example).

Each of the external device control units 718, when selected, controls at least one device assigned to the house 602 . For example, restaurant speaker control 718a, when selected, causes restaurant speaker 616 to play or pause music. In some embodiments, when the dining room speaker control 718a is selected, status information for the dining room speaker control 718a is provided by the dining room speaker 616 (eg, as shown by the bedroom speaker control 718e). Changed to indicate that media playback has been paused or media playback has stopped. Some of the external device controls 718 control multiple devices when selected. For example, the solarium speakers control 718d, when selected, causes the solarium speakers 656, 658 to play or pause playback of media and display on the solarium speakers control 718d. The status information to be changed is changed accordingly. Some of the external device controls 718 are not speaker device controls. For example, the external device control units 718 include a living room lamp control unit 718b that, when selected, turns the living room lamp 642 on/off, and status information displayed on the living room lamp control unit 718b is changed accordingly.

In some embodiments, external device controls 718 are selected from a group of other external controls that are also assigned to home 602 . For example, the six controls shown in FIG. 7B may be selected from a group of 10, 20, or 50 (or any other number greater than 6) external controls that are also assigned to house 602 . have. In some embodiments, external device controls 718 are selected based on a determination that each of these external device controls is a favorite control. In some embodiments, the determination of whether the external device is a favorites control may be determined by whether the external device control (or external device) has been used most recently, most frequently, newly added, (eg, one or more inputs based on whether they have been designated as a favorite important external device control (via their detection), etc., or any combination thereof.

At the bottom of the user interface 710 are navigation controls 722 . The navigation controls 722 include a home navigation control 722a , a room navigation control 722b , and an automated navigation control 722c . Each of the navigation controls 722, when selected, causes the device 700 to display a different user interface for the home application.

As illustrated in FIG. 7B , the user interface 710 includes a home multicast command 724 adjacent to a home multicast affordance 726 . In FIG. 7B , a home multicast command 724 indicates that a user selects (eg, “taps”) a home multicast affordance 726 to transmit an audio message to be multicast to one or more devices assigned to the home 602 . ) indicates that it should be In FIG. 7B , device 700 detects a tap gesture 750b at a location corresponding to home multicast affordance 726 .

In response to detecting the tap gesture 750b , the device 700 initiates a process for transmitting an audio multicast message to one or more devices assigned to the home 602 . In some embodiments, the process includes displaying the user interfaces shown in FIGS. 7C, 7D, and 7E described below. In some embodiments, the process includes displaying the user interface shown in FIG. 7C1 described below.

As illustrated in FIG. 7C , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750b , the user interface 730 includes a home destination identifier 732 , an end affordance 734 , and a multicast recording affordance 736 . . The home destination identifier 732 indicates that the audio multicast message is directed to the group of devices assigned to the home 602 (eg, to receive the audio multicast message). Termination affordance 734 is an affordance for exiting user interface 730 . In some embodiments, when the end affordance 734 is selected, the device 700 stops displaying the user interface 730 and redisplays the user interface 710 , as shown in FIG. 7B . same. In FIG. 7C , device 700 detects tap gesture 750c at a location corresponding to multicast recording affordance 736 .

7D , in response to detecting tap gesture 750c , device 700 displays user interface 740 . The user interface 740 includes a home destination identifier 732 and an end affordance 734 , which have also been included in the user interface 730 . In addition, the user interface 740 also includes an audio status bar 742 and an audio wave 744a.

Additionally, in FIG. 7D , device 700 also begins recording an audio multicast message in response to detecting tap gesture 750c. Audio for the audio multicast message is detected via one or more microphones of device 700 . Audio for an audio multicast message is detected from one or more external sources (eg, user voice). Here, the recorded audio is represented by an audio wave 744a , which is filling the audio status bar 742 over a period of time as more audio input is received by the device 700 .

As illustrated in FIG. 7D , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750c , the device 700 causes the multicast recording affordance 746 at the location where the multicast recording affordance 736 was previously displayed in FIG. 7C . is displayed. In FIG. 7D , device 700 detects tap gesture 750d at a location corresponding to multicast recording stop affordance 746 .

7E , in response to detecting tap gesture 750d , device 700 displays user interface 750 . 7E , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750d, the device 700 has ceased to record or capture audio from one or more external sources. As such, the user interface 750 includes an audio status bar 742 that is mostly populated by an audio wave 744a representing at least a portion of the recorded audio multicast message. As illustrated in FIG. 7E , user interface 750 (eg, in addition to including home destination identifier 732 , end affordance 734 , audio status bar 742 , audio wave 744a ) Cast message play affordance 752 and audio multicast message deletion affordance 754 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of the audio multicast message playback affordance 752 , the device 700 will initiate playback of the audio multicast message. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of the audio multicast message deletion affordance 754 , the device 700 will delete the audio multicast message. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of audio multicast message deletion affordance 754 , device 700 redisplays user interfaces 710 , 730 , and/or 740 .

As illustrated in FIG. 7E , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750d , the device 700 determines the location where the multicast recording stop affordance 746 was previously displayed in FIG. 7D (which is also the multicast recording affordance) Display the multicast transmit affordance 756 at 736 (where 736 was displayed in FIG. 7C ).

As an alternative to the flow described in FIGS. 7C, 7D, and 7E, device 700 may display the user interface illustrated in FIG. 7C1 in response to detecting tap gesture 750b in FIG. 7B. . 7C1 , in response to detecting tap gesture 750b , device 700 displays user interface 741 (eg, detecting any additional gestures, such as tap gesture 750c ). without this), it will automatically start recording audio multicast messages. As illustrated in FIG. 7C1 , the user interface 741 includes a home destination identifier 732 , an end affordance 734 , an audio wave 744a , and a multicast transmit affordance 747 , the device 700 comprising: Display using techniques similar to those described above with respect to FIGS. 7C, 7D, and 7E. For example, in FIG. 7C1 , audio wave 744a is dynamic and is time-varying over one or more characteristics of the audio currently being recorded (eg, volume level, pitch, tone) over the length of time the audio is being recorded. changes over the course of In some embodiments, audio wave 744a moves to the left as audio is being recorded over the length of time the audio is being recorded.

In some embodiments, instead of via the flow described in FIGS. 7C, 7D, and 7E and/or the flow described in FIG. 7C, the audio is directed to the user interface 710 of FIG. 7B or the user interface of FIG. 7C1 ( 741) is used. For example, in response to detecting a hold gesture on home multicast affordance 726 , device 700 begins recording an audio multicast message. In such an example, the recording is stopped when the hold gesture is terminated (eg, released), causing the home multicast affordance 726 to be replaced with a transmit affordance (eg, similar to the multicast transmit affordance 756 ). In some embodiments, when the hold gesture ends, the audio is automatically sent as a multicast message. In some embodiments, when the hold gesture ends, home multicast command 724 provides an affordance to play audio (eg, similar to audio status bar 742 ) and an affordance to delete audio (eg, similar to audio status bar 742 ). , similar to audio multicast message deletion affordance 754). In another example, in response to detecting a tap gesture on home multicast affordance 726 , home multicast affordance 726 operates similarly to multicast recording affordance 736 (eg, (multicast recording stop affordance) (Similar to (746)), replaced by a stop affordance). In such an example, in response to detecting a tap gesture on the stop affordance, (1) the stop affordance is replaced with a transmit affordance (eg, similar to the multicast transmit affordance 756 ), and (2) the home multicast instruction 724 ) is replaced with an affordance to play audio (eg, similar to audio status bar 742 ) and an affordance to delete audio (eg, similar to audio multicast message deletion affordance 754 ). In FIG. 7E , device 700 detects a tap gesture 750e at a location corresponding to multicast transmit affordance 756 , or in FIG. 7C1 , device 700 detects a location corresponding to multicast transmit affordance 747 . Detects a tap gesture 750c1 in .

As illustrated in FIG. 7F , in response to detecting tap gesture 750e or tap gesture 750c1 (or tap gesture on transmit affordance, as described in the previous paragraph), device 700 sends audio multi Causes the cast message to be multicast (sent) to a set of external devices assigned to home 602 . Such transmission may optionally include (1) transmitting a message comprising the audio multicast message to another device (eg, a device located within a home), and (2) the other device sending the audio multicast message to a set of external devices. to (in some embodiments, the other device identifies the set of external devices instead of device 700 ). Table 706 is provided to illustrate the external devices to which the audio multicast message is directed. For example, a checkmark in the "received audio multicast message" column indicates that the audio multicast message was directed to (e.g. sent to) an external device on the respective row of the checkmark; A dash in the "Received Audio Multicast Message" column indicates that the audio multicast message was not directed to (eg, not sent to) an external device on the respective row of dashes.

In FIG. 7F , table 706 shows that the audio multicast message is sent to each speaker (eg, dining room speaker 616 , bedroom speaker 636 , living room speaker 646 , living room speaker 648 , solarium speaker 656 ). , and the solarium speaker 658 ) being directed (and received by). In particular, the audio multicast message was also directed to personal devices (eg, John's phone 604, tablet 634, and Jane's phone 684). In some embodiments, the audio multicast message is directed to the personal device regardless of whether the personal device was at a location corresponding to the home (eg, whether distance 670 , 680 exceeds a threshold distance). do. For example, the audio multicast message was directed to John's phone 604 and tablet 634 located inside the house 602 in FIG. 6 . In addition, the audio multicast message is also sent to computer device 674 and Jane's phone 684 that are outside of home 602 (at distances 670 and 680 from home 602, respectively). was oriented In some embodiments, the audio multicast message is directed to the personal device depending on whether the personal device is included in the home's network (eg, the audio multicast message is directed to the personal device when the personal device is included in the home's network) ).

Table 706 of FIG. 7F also shows that although some external devices were assigned to home 602 , the audio multicast message was not directed to some external device (and thus did not receive the audio multicast message). indicates For example, table 706 shows that the audio multicast message was not directed to bedroom light 632 and living room lamp 642 . In some embodiments, audio multicast messages are not directed to some types of external devices, regardless of whether these external devices are assigned to the group of devices to which the audio multicast message is being transmitted. In some embodiments, these types of external devices include devices that do not have one or more audio input devices (eg, microphones) and/or one or more audio output devices (eg, speakers). In some embodiments, these types of external devices include devices that are inactive, unpowered, or non-functional at the time (or before) the time the audio message is transmitted.

As illustrated in FIG. 7F , at some point after detecting tap gesture 750e or tap gesture 750c1 (or tap gesture on transmit affordance, as described above), device 700 displays a user interface ( 710) is redisplayed. In some embodiments, user interface 710 is configured after device 700 detects tap gesture 750e or tap gesture 750c1 (eg, tap gesture 750e or tap gesture 750c1 (or as described above). As described above, after a predetermined period of time after detecting the tap gesture on the transmit affordance (eg, after a predetermined period of time after detecting the tap gesture), it is displayed without detecting any further inputs. In , user interface 710 is displayed when one or more additional inputs are detected, such as a tap gesture input detected on end affordance 734 of FIG. 7E .

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750f1 at a location corresponding to the living room lamp control 718b, the device 700 causes the living room lamp 642 to turn on (or the current state is on). If it is, it will send commands to turn it off). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750f2 at a location corresponding to the living room speaker control 718c, the device 700 causes the living room speakers 646 and 648 (or at least one of them) to will send instructions to initiate playback of the media (eg, to pause playback of the media if the current state is the playing state). In FIG. 7F , device 700 detects tap gesture 750f3 at a location corresponding to room navigation affordance 722b .

As illustrated in FIG. 7G , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750f3 , the device 700 displays a user interface 760 of the home application and a home navigation control 722a (eg, bold in FIG. 7G ). It indicates that the room navigation control unit 722b (shown in bold in FIG. 7G ) is selected instead of (not displayed). The user interface 760 is a user interface for controlling a plurality of external devices assigned to the living room 602d, as indicated by the living room location identifier 762 . The user interface 710 includes macro controls 766 , external device controls 768 , navigation controls 722 , a living room multicast command 774 , and a living room multicast affordance 776 . These elements of user interface 760 are specific controls for devices in the living room, as opposed to elements of user interface 710 that were controls for devices in the entire house. In some embodiments, one or more of these elements of user interface 760 have a similar purpose or function as one or more of the elements of user interface 710 described above (eg, in FIG. 7B ). In some embodiments, user interface 760 includes status information including current status of devices assigned to living room 602d. In some embodiments, device 700 displays a user interface 760 of a home application after receiving a swipe gesture on user interface 710 .

In particular, the user interfaces within the home application (eg, user interfaces 710 , 760 ) are laid out in a hierarchical structure. For example, the user interface 710 is an upper node in the hierarchy, and includes control units for a group of external devices allocated to the house 602 . And, while displaying user interface 710 , an input that causes device 700 to display user interface 760 (eg, a single input (eg, tap gesture 750f )) may be detected, and the user Interface 760 is a lower node in the hierarchy and includes controls for a group of external devices assigned to a respective room (eg, living room 602d) (and not other rooms) within house 602 .

As illustrated in FIG. 7G , the external device control units 768 include the living room speakers control unit 768a , the living room lamp control unit 768b , the living room switch (eg, light switch) control unit 768c , and the living room television control unit 768d . ) is included. In FIG. 7G , the living room speakers control 768a and living room lamp control 768b cause each of their respective external device(s), when selected (eg, in FIG. 7B ) to the living room lamp device control 718b and The living room speakers device control 718c causes their respective external device(s) to perform the same action(s) rather than the action(s) they would have performed. Thus, in this example, living room speakers control 768a and living room lamp control 768b are substantially the same controls as living room speakers device control 718c and living room lamp device control 718b, although they have their respective counterparts. They look visually different from each other. In some embodiments, the living room speakers control 768a and living room lamp control 768b do not appear visually different from the living room speakers device control 718c and the living room lamp device control 718b .

Compared with the external device control units 718 displayed in FIG. 7B , the external device control units 768 are at least one external device control unit that was displayed as part of the external device control units 718 in FIG. 7B (eg, a living room speaker). control unit 768a and living room lamp control unit 768b), and at least one other external device control unit (eg, living room switch control unit 768c and living room television control unit 768d). In other words, at least one external device (eg, living room speakers 646 , 648 ) may be controlled from user interfaces 710 , 760 , and at least one external device (eg, a bedroom within user interface 760 ). Speaker 636 and living room television) can only be controlled from one of user interface 710 and user interface 760 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750g1 at a location corresponding to the living room lamp control 768b, the device 700 causes the living room lamp 642 to turn on (or the current state is on). If it is, it will send commands to turn it off). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750g2 at a location corresponding to the living room speaker control 768a, the device 700 activates the living room speakers 646 and 648 (or at least one of them). will send instructions to initiate playback of the media (eg, to pause playback of the media if the current state is the playing state).

Additionally, although the external device controls 718 are designated as the favorite set of controls for the house 602 in FIG. 7B , the external device controls 768 include all controls assigned to the living room 602d in FIG. 7G . is a set In FIG. 7B , user interface 760 does not include any external devices that are not assigned to living room 602d. For example, the dining room speaker device control 718a , the solarium speakers device control 718d , the bedroom speaker device control 718e , and the bedroom lighting device control 718f are not displayed on the user interface 760 . In some embodiments, a user interface for controlling multiple external devices for another room (eg, such as a bedroom, solarium, kitchen) is displayed in response to detecting tap gesture 750f3 . In some embodiments, a user for controlling multiple external devices for another room is displayed in response to one or more inputs (eg, swipe input) detected in FIG. 7G .

As illustrated in FIG. 7G , user interface 760 includes a living room multicast command 774 adjacent to a living room multicast affordance 776 . In FIG. 7G , living room multicast command 774 indicates that a user selects (eg, " "tap"). Here, the living room multicast affordance 776 does not appear visually different from the home multicast affordance 726 (eg, of FIG. 7B ), and the device 700 for which the home multicast affordance 726 was displayed in FIG. 7B . displayed in the same position on the In some embodiments, the living room multicast affordance 776 appears visually different from the home multicast affordance 726 . In FIG. 7G , device 700 detects tap gesture 750g3 at a location corresponding to living room multicast affordance 776 .

In response to detecting tap gesture 750g3 , device 700 initiates a process for transmitting an audio multicast message to one or more devices assigned to living room 602d. In some embodiments, the process includes displaying a user interface 780a, as shown in FIG. 7H . In some embodiments, the process includes device 700 displaying a user interface similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 , displayed in response to detecting tap gesture 750g3 . In some embodiments, the process involves device 700 using a user interface similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 to record an audio multicast message for transmission to a group of devices assigned to living room 602d. including display. In some embodiments, the process involves device 700 displaying user interfaces, as described below in FIGS. 7H-7J , where audio is recorded and sent to a group of devices assigned to living room 602d. include that

As shown in FIG. 7H , in response to detecting tap gesture 750g3 , user interface 780a is similar to user interface 730 of FIG. 7C , so user interface 780a also includes an end affordance 734 . ) and a multicast write affordance 736 . However, the user interface 780a includes the living room destination identifier 782 instead of the home destination identifier 732 . Living room destination identifier 782 indicates that the group of devices assigned to living room 602d will receive the multicast message transmitted via user interface 780a . In some embodiments, user interface 780a does not list individual names/identifiers of devices that are part of a group. In some embodiments, one or more of the techniques discussed above with respect to user interface 730 may be applied to user interface 780a.

Referring to FIG. 7K , in some embodiments, user interface 780b responsive to detecting tap gesture 750g3 and one or more (or all) external devices (eg, a speaker) assigned to living room 602d ) are displayed in accordance with a determination that they are not available (eg, inactive or turned off). As illustrated in FIG. 7K , user interface 780b may display an unavailable indication to indicate that one or more of the external devices assigned to living room 602d are unavailable (or not all but some are unavailable) ( 788), and the multicast write affordance 736 is dimmed or displayed in gray. 7K , in response to detecting tap gesture 750k , device 700 indicates that one or more external devices assigned to living room 602d may be available because multicast recording affordance 736 is disabled (eg, living room 602d). until) continue to display the user interface 780b. In some embodiments, a user interface similar to user interface 780b is displayed in response to device 700 detecting tap gesture 750c in FIG. 7C .

Referring again to FIG. 7H , device 700 receives tap gesture 750h at a location corresponding to multicast recording affordance 736 .

7I , in response to receiving the tap gesture 750h , the device 700 begins recording audio from one or more external sources (eg, using the microphone of the device 700 ) and , displays a user interface 784 similar to user interface 740 of FIG. 7D . Like user interface 740 , user interface 784 includes an end affordance 734 , an audio status bar 742 , and a multicast recording stop affordance 746 . However, the user interface 784 includes an audio wave 744b representing the audio being recorded, which is different from the recorded audio in FIG. 7D that was represented by the audio wave 744a. User interface 784 also includes a living room destination identifier 782 instead of a home destination identifier 732 . In some embodiments, one or more of the techniques discussed above with respect to user interface 740 may be applied to user interface 784 . In FIG. 7I , device 700 detects tap gesture 750i at a location corresponding to multicast recording stop affordance 746 .

7J , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750i , the device 700 displays a user interface 786 and ceases to record or capture audio from one or more external sources. User interface 786 is, except that audio wave 744b is being displayed (instead of audio wave 744a) and living room destination identifier 782 is being displayed (instead of home destination identifier 732). It is similar to user interface 750 . In some embodiments, one or more of the techniques discussed above with respect to user interface 750 may be applied to user interface 786 . In FIG. 7J , device 700 displays a tap gesture 750j (or (e.g., tap) on a user interface similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 as described above at a location corresponding to multicast transmit affordance 756 . a tap gesture (similar to gesture 750c1).

In some embodiments, device 700 may display a tap gesture 750j (or (eg, tap gesture) on a user interface similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 as described above, as illustrated in FIG. 7L , in some embodiments. In response to detecting a tap gesture (similar to 750c1 ), display user interface 790 . Device 700 displays user interface 790 when it determines that the audio multicast message cannot be delivered to one or more (or all) of the external devices assigned to living room 602d. The user interface 790 includes an undelivered indication 791 to indicate that the audio multicast message has not been delivered to the target external devices. In some embodiments, a user interface similar to user interface 790 is displayed in response to device 700 detecting tap gesture 750e in FIG. 7E or tap gesture 750c1 in FIG. 7C1 .

In some embodiments, one or more of user interfaces 730 , 740 , 750 , 780a , 780b , 784 , 786 , 790 are configured to swap the intended target of the recorded audio multicast message (eg, change the destination identifier). ) includes affordances for For example, after initiating a process for transmitting an audio multicast message to a first group of devices (eg, devices assigned to home 602 ) (eg, while showing FIG. 7j and input 750j or Before receiving a tap gesture (eg, similar to tap gesture 750c1 ) on a user interface, such as user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 as described above, device 700 indicates the intent of the recorded audio multicast message. Selection of an affordance (eg, multiple affordances for swapping an intended target) for swapping the intended target from a first group of devices to a second group of devices (eg, devices assigned to restaurant 602b) can be detected.

In some embodiments, audio is recorded and transmitted from a user interface similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 that is displayed in response to detecting tap gesture 750g. In some embodiments, the audio is recorded from the user interface 760 of FIG. 7G , instead of being recorded via the flow described in FIGS. 7H-7J . For example, in response to detecting a hold gesture on living room multicast affordance 776 , device 700 begins recording an audio multicast message. In such an example, the recording is stopped when the hold gesture is terminated (eg, released), causing the living room multicast affordance 776 to be replaced by a transmit affordance (eg, similar to the multicast transmit affordance 756 ). In such an example, the living room multicast command 774 provides an affordance to play audio (e.g., similar to audio status bar 742) and an affordance to delete audio (e.g., an audio multicast message delete affordance 754). similar to) is replaced with In another example, in response to detecting a tap gesture on living room multicast affordance 776 , living room multicast affordance 776 operates similarly to multicast recording affordance 736 (eg, (multicast recording stop affordance) (Similar to (746)), replaced by a stop affordance). In such an example, in response to detecting a tap gesture on the stop affordance, the stop affordance is replaced with a transmit affordance (eg, similar to the multicast transmit affordance 756 ), and the living room multicast instruction 774 is used to play the audio. an affordance (eg, similar to audio status bar 742) and an affordance to delete audio (eg, similar to audio multicast message deletion affordance 754).

As illustrated in table 706 of FIG. 7M , tap gesture 750j (or tap gesture on transmit affordance, as described in the previous paragraph, or similar to user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 as described above) In response to detecting a tap gesture (eg, similar to tap gesture 750c1 ) on the user interface, device 700 multicasts the audio multicast message to the set of external devices assigned to living room 602d . (sent or directed). Such transmission may optionally include (1) transmitting a message comprising the audio multicast message to another device (eg, a device located within a living room), and (2) the other device sending the audio multicast message to a set of external devices. to (in some embodiments, the other device identifies the set of external devices instead of device 700 ). As shown by table 706, the audio multicast message is directed only to living room speakers 646, 648 that receive the audio multicast message. In particular, the audio multicast message is not directed to personal devices (eg, John's phone 604, tablet 634, and Jane's phone 684), since the personal devices are not directed to the groups corresponding to the rooms. (eg, personal devices are not assigned to a group corresponding to living room 602d). Additionally, the audio multicast message is not directed to the living room lamp 642 because the living room lamp 642 may receive audio multicast messages for similar reasons discussed above (eg, in FIG. 7F ). This is because it is not the type of device.

In FIG. 7M , device 700 detects voice input 792a that includes the phrase “HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST HELLO.” Moments after detecting the portion of voice input 792a , device 700 displays indication 794a along with user interface 794 (eg, to the left of user interface 794 ). Here, indication 794a is a response to a portion of voice input 792a. Indicia 794a is text written "WHAT CAN I HELP YOU WITH?" In some embodiments, device 700 outputs media comprising an audible version of indication 794a.

In FIG. 7N , after displaying the user interface 794 in FIG. 7M , the device 700 displays an indication 794b to the right of the user interface 794 . In addition, device 700 displays indicator 794c to the left of user interface 794 and below indicator 794b. Indicia 794b is text in which "HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST HELLO" is written, which is text corresponding to the audible phrase included in voice input 792a. Additionally, the indication 794c is text written "OK, I'VE SENT YOUR MULTICAST TO 123 MAIN ST." In particular, 123 Main St. is an identifier for the house 602 (eg, the house location identifier 712 in FIG. 7B ). In some embodiments, device 700 outputs media comprising an audible version of response 794c.

As shown by table 706 in FIG. 7N , after detecting voice input 792a , device 700 sends an audio multicast message to home 602 , as described above with respect to FIG. 7F . Directs (eg, transmits) to the assigned one or more devices. Table 706 shows that the audio multicast message (eg, “Hello”) is sent to each speaker of the house (eg, dining room speaker 616 , bedroom speaker 636 , living room speaker 646 , living room speaker 648 , directed to the solarium speaker 656 , and the solarium speaker 658 ), and an audio multicast message (eg, “Hello”) whether the device was at a location corresponding to the home (as discussed above) Directed to the home's personal devices (eg, John's phone 604, tablet 634, Jane's phone 684) regardless of and/or whether the device is connected to a network associated with the home show that it is

As illustrated in FIG. 7O , shortly after displaying the user interface 794 in FIG. 7N , the device 700 displays the user interface 710 . While displaying user interface 710 , device 700 detects gesture 750o (eg, a long press gesture) at a location corresponding to bedroom speaker control 718e in FIG. 7O .

As illustrated in FIG. 7P , in response to detecting the gesture 750o , the device 700 provides a plurality of setting affordances (eg, a room setting (eg, where the bedroom is selected in 7p to show that bedroom speaker 636 is assigned to bedroom 602c), favorite settings (e.g., here in FIG. 7P, may cause bedroom speaker control 718e to be displayed on user interface 710) a user interface 796 including the contents of the existing favorites selected)). As illustrated in FIG. 7P , one of the setup affordances is a multicast setup affordance 796a , which includes an indication that the bedroom speaker 636 is configured to receive multicast messages. In FIG. 7P , device 700 detects tap gesture 750p at a location corresponding to multicast setup affordance 796a.

7Q , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750p , the device 700 displays a user interface 798 that includes a multicast settings toggle 798a. In FIG. 7Q , the multicast settings toggle 798a indicates that the bedroom speaker 636 is configured to receive multicast messages (eg, a circle is displayed to the right of the settings toggle). 7Q , device 700 detects tap gesture 750q at a location corresponding to multicast set affordance 798a.

7R , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750q , the device 700 performs a multicast toggle 798a to indicate that the bedroom speaker 636 is not configured to receive multicast messages. Change the state of (eg, move the circle to the left of the settings toggle). In some embodiments, the multicast setting affordance 796a of FIG. 7P is selectable to change the setting from on to off without navigating to a different user interface (eg, user interface 798 ).

7S , device 700 detects speech input 792b that includes the phrase “HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST TO THE SUNROOM, HELLO”. Moments after detecting the portion of voice input 792b , device 700 displays indication 794d along with user interface 794 (eg, to the left of user interface 794 ). Here, indication 794d is a response to a portion of voice input 792b. Indicia 794d is text written "WHAT CAN I HELP YOU WITH?" In some embodiments, device 700 outputs media comprising an audible version of indication 794d.

In FIG. 7T , after displaying the user interface 794 in FIG. 7S , the device 700 displays an indication 794e to the right of the user interface 794 , and to the left of the user interface 794 (and to the 794e) under) display 794f. The indication 794e is text in which "HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST TO THE SUNROOM, HELLO" is written, which is the text corresponding to the audible phrase included in the voice input 792b. Additionally, the indication 794f is text written "OK, I'VE SENT YOUR MULTICAST TO THE SUNROOM." In particular, “solarium” is an identifier for a group of devices assigned to solarium 602e in FIG. 6 .

As shown by table 706 in FIG. 7T , after detecting voice input 792b, device 700 directs the audio multicast message to one or more devices assigned to solarium 602e ( e.g. transmit). Table 706 shows that the audio multicast message (eg, “Hello”) is directed to the solarium speaker 656 and the solarium speaker 658 , and the audio multicast message (eg, “Hello”) is directed to other devices. shows that it is not oriented to In particular, voice input 792b included an identifier (eg, “sunroom”), whereas voice 792a did not. Thus, in some embodiments, when voice input is detected without an identifier, device 700 will transmit audio multicast messages to the group of devices assigned to the default group. In some embodiments, the default group is a group corresponding to a house (eg, such as house 602 ), as described above with respect to FIG. 7N .

7U , device 700 detects voice input 792c that includes the phrase “HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST TO THE ENTERTAINMENT ZONE, HELLO”. Moments after detecting the portion of voice input 792c , device 700 displays indication 794g along with user interface 794 (eg, to the left of user interface 794 ). Here, indication 794g is a response to a portion of voice input 792c. The mark 794g is text written "WHAT CAN I HELP YOU WITH?" In some embodiments, device 700 outputs media comprising an audible version of indication 794g.

In FIG. 7V , shortly after displaying user interface 794 in FIG. 7U , device 700 displays indication 794i to the left of user interface 794 (and below indication 794h ). Mark 794i is text written "OK, I'VE SENT YOUR MULTICAST TO THE ENTERTAINMENT ZONE". A zone is an identifier for multiple groups of devices. Here, the entertainment zone 660 is assigned to the group of devices corresponding to the solarium 602e of FIG. 6 and the group of devices corresponding to the living room 602d of FIG. 6 .

As shown by table 706 in FIG. 7V , after detecting voice input 792c , device 700 directs (eg, transmits) the audio multicast message to one or more devices assigned to the entertainment area. box). Table 706 shows that an audio multicast message (eg, “Hello”) is directed to living room speaker 646 , living room speaker 648 , solarium speaker 656 , and solarium speaker 658 , Shows that the cast message (eg "Hello") is not directed to other devices.

As illustrated in FIG. 7V , device 700 also displays multicast notification 708a indicating that a new audio multicast message has been received from the group of devices assigned to solarium 602e. The new audio multicast message is a reply to the audio multicast message sent in FIG. 7T.

In FIG. 7W , the device 700 detects a voice input 792d including the phrase “Hey Assistant, Multicast, we are going to leave soon”.

In FIG. 7X , some time after detecting voice input 792d , device 700 displays indicator 794j to the left of user interface 794 and below indicator 794i . Indicia 794j is text written "HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST, WE ARE GOING TO LEAVE SOON". This text corresponds to the audible phrase included in the spoken input 792d. Here, the voice input 792d does not include an identifier. Additionally, in FIG. 7X , device 700 also displays indicator 794k to the right of user interface 794 and below indicator 794j . Indicia 794k is text that says "OK, I'VE SENT YOUR MULTICAST TO THE SUNROOM."

As shown by table 706 in FIG. 7X , after detecting voice input 792d, device 700 assigns an audio multicast message (eg, “We are going to leave soon”) to the solarium. Initiate a process for transmitting to a group of devices. In particular, device 700 directs (eg, transmits) an audio multicast message to one or more devices assigned to solarium 602e without voice input 792d including an identifier for solarium. Accordingly, because the voice input 792d was detected within a predetermined period of time after receiving the multicast notification 708a , the device 700 sends the next detected audio multicast message to the default group (the group corresponding to the home 602 ). ) intelligently directed towards the solarium instead. In some embodiments, device 700 intelligently routes the next detected audio multicast message to the solarium instead of the default group because voice input 702d is from when the previous multicast message was sent to the solarium. This is because it is received within a predetermined time. In some embodiments, two different zones may share at least one group of devices (eg, the same group of devices assigned to a particular room).

As illustrated in FIG. 7X , device 700 also displays multicast notification 708b indicating that an audio multicast message has been received from the group of devices assigned to solarium 602e. Here, the device 700 receives this message at 10:19.

In FIG. 7Y , device 700 detects voice input 792e including the phrase “HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST, LET'S GO TO DINNER” and displays indication 794l along with user interface 794 . Mark 794l reads "WHAT CAN I HELP YOU WITH?" In FIG. 7Y , the time is now 10:30 (eg, 11 minutes have passed since the user interface of FIG. 7X was displayed).

In FIG. 7Z , after displaying the user interface 794 in FIG. 7Y , the device 700 displays an indication 794m to the right of the user interface 794 , and to the left of the user interface 794 (and to the 794m) below) display 794n. The display 794m is text in which "HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST, LET'S GO TO DINNER" is written, which is a text corresponding to the audible phrase included in the voice input 792e. Additionally, the indication 794n is text written "OK, I'VE SENT YOUR MULTICAST TO 123 MAIN ST."

As shown by table 706 in FIG. 7Z , after detecting voice input 792e , device 700 , without voice input 792e including an identifier for home 602 , multicasts the audio Directs (eg, transmits) a message (eg, “Let's go to dinner”) to one or more devices assigned to home 602 . Here, since a period exceeding a predetermined period has elapsed since the multicast notification 708b was received, the device 700 sends the next detected audio multicast message to the default group (home) instead of the solarium 602e. (group corresponding to 602) intelligently route. In some embodiments, device 700 intelligently routes the detected audio multicast message to a default group because voice input 702e is from when a previous multicast message was sent to solarium 602e. This is because it is not received within a predetermined time.

Also, as shown by table 706 in FIG. 7Z , the multicast message in FIG. 7Z (as opposed to FIG. 7N ) was not directed to the bedroom speaker 636 because This is because the multicast setting for , is turned off in response to detecting the tap gesture 750q in FIG. 7q.

Shortly after displaying user interface 794 in FIG. 7Z , device 700 displays user interface 710 as illustrated in FIG. 7AA . In FIG. 7AA , device 700 detects a tap gesture 750aa at a location corresponding to home settings affordance 928 over home location identifier 712 in FIG. 7AA .

As illustrated in FIG. 7A , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750aa , the device 700 displays a user interface 797 . User interface 797 includes a group of people 797a having one or more personal devices assigned to a home application (eg, a group corresponding to home 602a ). User interface 797 also includes multicast grants affordance 797b. 7Ab , device 700 detects a tap gesture 750ab at a location corresponding to multicast grants affordance 797b.

As illustrated in FIG. 7A , in response to detecting the tap gesture 750ab , the device 700 causes a user interface 799 that includes a plurality of options when allowing audio multicast messages to be transmitted to the personal device. is displayed. In FIG. 7ac , the options include never option 779a, at home option 779b, and anytime option 799c. In Figure 7ac, anytime option 799c is selected. Thus, in some embodiments, device 700 is configured to receive multicast messages at any time, regardless of the location of device 700 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750c1 at the location corresponding to the never option 779a , the device 700 never receives the multicast messages, regardless of the location of the device 700 . configured not to. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 750c2 at a location corresponding to the at home option 799b , the device 700 is placed at or at a location where the device 700 corresponds to the home 602 . and receive only multicast messages while within 602 (eg, within a threshold distance of the home or with respect to whether the device is connected to one or more networks associated with home 602 ). In some embodiments, when device 700 is a distance 670 and distance 680 from home, such as computer device 674 and Jane's phone 684 , device 700 is their distance. It will not receive an audio multicast message when the at home option 799b is selected if they are greater than the threshold distance. In some embodiments, one or more options are selectable and displayed, such as an option to only receive messages while the device is away from home. In some embodiments, when device 700 is connected to one or more networks associated with home 602 (eg, connected to a home Wi-Fi network), device 700 has at home option 799b enabled. will receive an audio multicast message when selected; If device 700 is not connected to one or more networks associated with home 602 (eg, not connected to a home Wi-Fi network), device 700 (eg, regardless of the location of the device) at You will not receive an audio multicast message when the home option 799b is selected.

7Ad and 7ae illustrate example user interfaces for displaying the user interfaces described above on a device having a larger screen than device 700 , such as tablet 634 . The user interface 711 of FIG. 7Ad corresponds to the user interface 710 discussed above. Moreover, the user interface 731 of FIG. 7ae corresponds to the user interface 730 discussed above. However, any of the user interfaces discussed above may be displayed and transitioned on the tablet 634 using one or more techniques similar to those discussed above with respect to FIGS. 7A-7A .

7af-7ah illustrate example user interfaces for displaying the user interfaces described above on a device having a smaller screen than device 700 , such as smartwatch 701 . The user interface 713 of FIG. 7af corresponds to the user interface 710 discussed above. Moreover, the user interface 741 of FIG. 7Ag corresponds to the user interface 740 discussed above. Also, the user interface 751 of FIG. 7Ah corresponds to the user interface 750 discussed above. However, any of the user interfaces discussed above may be displayed and transitioned on the smartwatch 701 using one or more techniques similar to those discussed above with respect to FIGS. 7A-7A .

8A and 8B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for transmitting an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 800 is performed at a computer system (eg, 100 , 300 , 500 , 634 , 674 , 700 , 701 , 850 ) in communication with a display generating component (eg, a touch-sensitive display). Some operations of method 800 are selectively combined, the orders of some operations are selectively changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

As described below, method 800 provides an intuitive method for transmitting an audio message, in accordance with some embodiments. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user of sending an audio message, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to transmit audio messages faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

The computer system, via the display creation component, displays (802) a first user interface (eg, 730) (eg, a user interface for controlling a set of external devices). The first user interface includes (eg, includes a display) a first selectable user interface object (eg, 726 ), wherein selection of the first selectable user interface object includes a first audio message (eg, A process (e.g., user interfaces 730, 740; 750)), wherein the set of external devices includes a first set of one or more external devices (eg, 616 ) and a second set of one or more external devices (eg, 646 , 648 ). In some embodiments, while displaying the first selectable user interface object, the computer system receives an input corresponding to selection of the first selectable user interface object, wherein the computer system receives an input corresponding to selection of the first selectable user interface object. In response to receiving the input, the computer system displays a user interface for recording and transmitting the audio message to the first set of one or more devices and the second set of one or more devices (eg, a set of external devices). In some embodiments, the first set of one or more devices is different from the second set of one or more devices. In some embodiments, the user interface for controlling the set of external devices is configured to display a plurality of representations and/or accessory control user interface objects corresponding to the first set of one or more devices and the second set of one or more devices. include that In some embodiments, the plurality of accessory control user interface objects corresponds to a first set of one or more devices, and the second set of one or more devices is a set of one or more selectable user interface objects. In some embodiments, each of the plurality of accessory control user interface objects, when selected, causes a respective accessory device in the set of external devices to perform one or more functions and/or to change a state of the respective accessory device do. In some embodiments, the set of external devices is an external electronic device (eg, a cellular phone; type of tablet computer). In some embodiments, the set of external devices is a higher level location (or destination) (eg, a first type of location) (eg, a home location, a business, an office (eg, a location that is a higher level location (eg, a higher level location)). one or more locations (e.g., sub-locations) and/or one or more areas (or zones) within the area and/or perimeter defined by the location of location, one or more locations (eg, sub-locations) and/or a location that is (eg, programmatically) linked to one or more regions (or regions)))). In some embodiments, the set of external devices includes a first group of devices (eg, a subgroup of devices) and a second group of devices (eg, a subgroup of devices). In some embodiments, a subgroup of devices is linked to a lower-level location (eg, to a higher-level location (eg, within a boundary, area, or perimeter of the higher-level location; and/or to a higher-level location (eg, by a user)) a room in which (eg, programmatically linked), defined, and/or identified) is located, and/or an area within a higher-level location (eg, a boundary, area, or a location within the perimeter and/or defined by two or more sub-locations that are linked, defined, and/or identified (eg, by the user) (eg, including a living room and a dining room within a higher level location). entertainment area, a private area including two or more bedrooms, living rooms, bathrooms in a higher level location)). In some embodiments, the target group is associated with a subgroup of devices rather than a higher level group of devices.

The first user interface includes a first accessory control user interface object (eg, one of 718) (eg, a selectable user interface object) corresponding to the first external accessory device, wherein the Select (eg, 750f1 , 750f2) initiates a process for sending a command to change the state of the first external accessory device (eg, cause a door to be locked or unlocked, and a light to be turned on or off) (eg, selection causes the transmission of commands). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the input, the computer system initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device (eg, selecting causes transmission of the command), the first The visual appearance of the accessory control user interface object may vary from a first visual appearance to a second visual appearance that is different from the first visual appearance (eg, from a depressed state to a depressed state (or vice versa), from a first color to a second color) , one or more difference characters (eg, from "on" to "off" (or vice versa)) is changed.

The computer system, while displaying the first user interface (eg, and the first user interface), generates the second user interface (eg, 760) (eg, without controlling the first set of one or more external devices (eg, the first user interface)). ) input (eg, 750f3) corresponding to a request to display a user interface for controlling a second set of one or more external devices (eg, a single user input (eg, for controlling a second set of one or more external devices) (804) a tap input on a selectable user interface object or icon to navigate to the user interface or a plurality of user inputs received while the first selectable user interface object is displayed. In some embodiments, the computer system receives the request to display the second user interface when the computer system receives selection of a selectable user interface object for displaying the second user interface.

In response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, the computer system displays ( 806 ) the second user interface (eg, 760 ). The second user interface includes (eg, includes displaying) a second selectable user interface object 812 (eg, 776 ), wherein selection of the second selectable user interface object includes a second audio A process for recording a message and sending a second audio message to a second set of one or more external devices (eg, 646, 648) without sending a second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices (eg, 706 in FIG. 7M) (e.g., discloses user interfaces 780a, 784, 786a. The second user interface (e.g., without corresponding to the first set of one or more devices) is a second external accessory device (e.g., 642, 646, 648) ) corresponding to a second accessory control user interface object 814 (eg, one of 768) (eg, a selectable user interface object), wherein the selection of a second accessory control user interface object (eg, 750g1 , 750g2) initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of a second external accessory device (eg, selecting causes sending of the command. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the input, the computer system initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of a second external accessory device (eg, selection results in transmission of the command), wherein the visual appearance of the second accessory control user interface object is changed from the first visual appearance to the first to a second visual appearance that is different from the visual appearance (eg, from a depressed state to a depressed state (or vice versa), from a first color to a second color, with one or more difference characters (eg, from "on" to "off") (or vice versa)) In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, the computer system stops displaying the first user interface and the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the second The selectable user interface object replaces the first selectable user interface object. In some embodiments, the second selectable user interface object is displayed in the same location where the first selectable user interface object was previously displayed. In some embodiments, the second user interface replaces the display of the first user interface. In some embodiments, the computer system is unable to control the first set of one or more external devices from the second user interface (eg, unable to cause the external device to change state) (eg, the second set of one or more devices). 1 The accessory control user interface object corresponding to one of the sets is not displayed). In some embodiments, the first user interface includes one or more representations corresponding to the first set of one or more external devices (without displaying the set of one or more representations corresponding to the second set of one or more external devices) and and/or displaying a set of accessory control user interface objects. In some embodiments, each of the accessory control user interface objects, when selected, causes the respective device to perform one or more functions and change the state of the respective device. In some embodiments, while displaying the second selectable user interface object, the computer system receives an input corresponding to selection of the second selectable user interface object, wherein the computer system receives an input corresponding to selection of the second selectable user interface object. In response to receiving the input, the computer system displays a user interface for recording the audio message and sending the audio message to the second set of one or more external devices without sending the audio message to the first set of one or more external devices. do. In some embodiments, while displaying the second selectable user interface object, the computer system includes displaying the selectable user interface object (eg, without controlling the second set of one or more external devices). ) receive a user input (eg, a swipe input) corresponding to a request to display a user interface for controlling a first set of one or more external devices, wherein the selectable user interface object, when selected, records an audio message and transmit an audio message to a first set of one or more external devices without sending an audio message to a second set of one or more external devices. In some embodiments, the audio message includes audio recorded at the computer system. In some embodiments, a process for recording and transmitting an audio message to an external device includes recording the audio message using a computer system (eg, using a microphone in communication with the computer system). In some embodiments, the audio message includes voice audio of a user of the computer system. Providing hierarchical user interfaces for controlling a hierarchical set of controls allows the user to control another respective user for controlling a different respective set of devices, when each user interface corresponds to a node in the respective hierarchy. It provides the user with visual feedback about the sets of devices within the hierarchy of controls that can be controlled through the respective user interface, along with visual feedback on how to intuitively navigate to the interface. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first external accessory device (eg, 718b) is different from the second external accessory device (eg, 768c). In some embodiments, the first external accessory device is an external device that is grouped under the "Home" group, but is not part of the "Dining Room" category (eg, a light located within a bedroom), and the second external accessory device is Both the "Home" group and the "Dining Room" category are external devices grouped under (eg, lighting located within a restaurant). In contrast, in some embodiments, the first external accessory device is the same device as the second external accessory device (eg, they are the same lights located within the dining room, or they are the same smart speakers located within the dining room).

In some embodiments, the first selectable user interface object (eg, 726 ) is located (eg, while displayed as part of the first user interface) at a first location (eg, on a display creation component) via a display creation component (eg, on a display creation component). Displayed, eg, at positions 726 and 776 ), and a second selectable user interface object (eg, 776 ) via a display creation component (eg, while displayed as part of a second user interface) (eg, a display creation component). on) at a first location (eg, at locations 726 and 776). In some embodiments, the input received while displaying the first user interface causes the second selectable user interface object to replace the display of the first selectable user interface object. Providing the first selectable user interface or the second selectable user interface objects at the same location when the prescribed conditions are met does not allow any different operational characteristics of the user selectable user interface object (eg, a particular selectable user Allows to quickly locate a selectable user interface object for multicasting without having to identify which particular set of devices the interface object will be selectable from from which to transmit the recorded audio message. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-system It makes the interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a first external accessory device (eg, 646 , 648 ) (eg, a smart speaker, wherein playback of music can be configured using a first accessory control user interface object) is a set of external devices (eg, a first external accessory device may be configured from a first user interface, and audio (recorded in the computer system) is transmitted to the first external accessory device using a first selectable user interface object) . In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a third accessory control user interface object (eg, 718b) (eg, a selectable user interface object) corresponding to a third external accessory device (eg, 642 ). In some embodiments, selection of the third accessory control user interface object is to send a command to change the state of the third external accessory device (eg, cause a door to be locked or unlocked, and a light to be turned on or off). Initiates a process (eg, selection results in the transmission of an instruction). In some embodiments, the third external accessory device (eg, 642 ) is not included in the set of external devices, and selection of the first selectable user interface object (eg, 776 ) records (records/records the first audio message) or) to a third external accessory device (eg, 706 in FIG. 7F ). In some embodiments, the first user interface can be controlled (eg, turned on/off) but the first audio message is transmitted (eg, because some external accessory devices do not have a speaker for playback of the audio message) accessory control user interface objects for some external accessory devices that are not, the first user interface can be controlled (eg, turned on/off) (eg, some external accessory devices do not control playback of an audio message); Accessory control user interface objects for some of those external accessory devices to which the first audio message is sent). In some embodiments, the second user interface can be controlled (eg, turned on/off) but the second audio message is transmitted (eg, because some external accessory devices do not have a speaker for playback of the audio message). accessory control user interface objects for some external accessory devices that are not, a second user interface that can be controlled (eg, turned on/off) (eg, some external accessory devices do not control playback of an audio message); Accessory control user interface objects for some external accessory devices to which the second audio message is sent). In some embodiments, the first set of one or more external devices (eg, a device in a bedroom group to which an audio message is transmitted) does not include a first external accessory device (eg, a light in a bedroom group to which an audio message is not transmitted). and the second set of external devices (eg, the device in the restaurant group to which the audio message is sent) does not include the second external accessory device (eg, the light in the restaurant group to which the audio message is not sent). Thus, in some embodiments, the audio message is to be controlled using accessory control user interface objects that, when selected, cause the respective accessory device to perform one or more functions and/or change the state of the respective accessory device. It is not transmitted to all possible devices. In some embodiments, an external device that can be controlled (to perform one or more functions and/or change the state of the respective accessory device) using a respective accessory control user interface object is a set of external devices (eg, an external first or second set of devices), so that an audio message can be sent to such an external device, and such external device can be controlled separately.

In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location (eg, 602 ) (eg, structure, house) and the second user interface is a first sub-location of a first type (eg, 602a - 602e) (eg, 602d) (eg, a room in a structure, a restaurant in a house). In some embodiments, a second set of one or more external devices (eg, 646, 648) corresponds to a first sub-location (eg, 602d) (eg, a second set of one or more external devices is of the first type) assigned to a sub-location). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more external devices (eg, 646 , 648 ) (eg, any of them) includes a list of one or more external devices corresponding to the first sub-location (eg, 602a - 602e). A second sub-location (eg, 602a, 602b, 602c, or 602e) based on the second set (eg, any sub-location (other than the first sub-location) of the first type (eg, any other room of the structure) )) cannot be made to correspond. In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher-level location and the second user interface corresponds to a lower-level location (eg, a room in a house) of the higher-level location. In some embodiments, the first room and the second room are part of a zone (eg, a collection of rooms grouped together). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more external devices are devices that have been identified (eg, by the user) as being located within the room for which the second user interface corresponds.

In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location (eg, structure, house) and the second user interface is a plurality (eg, 602a - 602e) of a first type (eg, 602a - 602e). corresponds to a third sub-location (eg, entertainment area (eg, 602d, 602e)) (eg, first zone, main floor) of a second type corresponding to sub-locations (eg, a plurality of rooms). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more external devices includes a second set of one or more external devices in a plurality of sub-locations (eg, 602a - 602e) of the first type (eg, a first room (eg, home) corresponding to a third sub-location based on being included in a plurality of rooms of the structure, including a dining room in the house) and a second room (eg, a bedroom in the house). In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location and the second user interface corresponds to a lower location of the higher level location (eg, multiple rooms of a house). In some embodiments, the second set of one or more external devices includes at least one device assigned to the first room, and at least one device assigned to the second room. In some embodiments, the higher-level location corresponds to at least one device to which the third lower-level location does not correspond (eg, the house includes some devices not included in the third lower-level location).

In some embodiments, the second external accessory device is associated with (eg, corresponding to) a third sub-location (eg, entertainment zone (eg, 602d, 602e) (eg, first zone) of a second type). In some embodiments, the second external accessory device (eg, 646 , 648 ) is also a fourth sub-location (eg, second zone) of a second type different from the third sub-location (eg, an entertainment zone (eg, a second zone)) 602d, 602e)) (eg, corresponding thereto). In some embodiments, the second zone is a sub-location (eg, multiple rooms of a house). In some embodiments, the second zone is associated with an external accessory device that is not associated with the first zone. In some embodiments, the computer system may initiate processes for recording and transmitting messages to the various regions. The first zone and the second zone may correspond to different sets of devices, some of which correspond to both the first zone and the second zone, some of which correspond to only one of the first zone or the second zone. respond

In some embodiments, a second set of one or more external devices (eg, 646, 648) is associated with a first location (eg, 602d) (eg, room, sub-location, zone) and records a second audio message and a process for transmitting a second audio message to a second set of one or more external devices without transmitting a second audio message to the first set of one or more external devices includes an indication (eg, textual representation, graphic indication) (eg, text specifying the name of the room or area to which the audio message is to be sent). In some embodiments, processes for recording and transmitting audio messages include displaying an indication of a location corresponding to external devices to which the respective audio message is to be transmitted. In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher-level location (eg, a structure such as a house) and the second user interface corresponds to a lower-level location (eg, a room of a house, a section of a house) of the higher-level location do. In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface, the computer system detects selection of the second selectable user interface object (eg, tap, press and hold thereon). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of the second selectable user interface object, the computer system displays the historical user interface (eg, by replacing all or part of the second user interface), the historical user interface Record user interface object (e.g., selectable record button) - selection of a record user interface object (e.g., tap, press and hold on it) of the audio message by recording the audio detected by the computer system cause a record -; and indications (eg, textual representations, graphical representations) of sub-locations (eg, text specifying the name of the room or area to which the audio message is to be sent). In some embodiments, the second user interface includes an indication of the sub-location. Displaying an indication of the location associated with the group of devices for which the audio message is intended to be multicasted provides the user with visual feedback regarding the status of the process for recording and transmitting the audio message. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-system It makes the interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of initiating a process for recording an audio message and transmitting it to external devices, the computer system automatically (eg, via user input corresponding to a request to initiate recording of audio) without prompting), initiates the recording of a new audio message and displays a recording user interface (eg, 741 ) that includes a dynamic indication (eg, 744a) of the audio being recorded.

In some embodiments, the computer system detects selection (eg, tap, press and hold on) a historical user interface object. In response to detecting selection of the recording user interface object, the computer system records an audio message. Subsequent to recording the audio message (and prior to sending the audio message), the computer system provides the option to change the external devices to which the message is sent. In some embodiments, the computer system receives activation of the drop-down affordance and, in response, displays one or more sub-locations, each corresponding to a respective set of external devices. The computer system receives a selection of one of the one or more sub-locations, and a confirmation to send the audio message. In response, the computer system sends the audio message to the respective set of external devices corresponding to the selected sub-location, rather than the second set of one or more external devices corresponding to the second user interface.

In some embodiments, the set of external devices includes a personal mobile electronic device (eg, 604, 634, 684) (eg, smartphone, cell phone, watch). In some embodiments, the personal mobile electronic device is not included in the first set of one or more devices and is not included in the second set of one or more external devices. In some embodiments, the personal mobile electronic device is not assigned to any lower-level location of the higher-level location, but is a member of the higher-level location. Thus, in some embodiments, selecting the first selectable user interface object may result in an external device recording an audio message and including a personal mobile electronic device (and any other personal mobile electronic devices that are members of a higher level location). Initiate a process for transmitting to a set of

In some embodiments, the second set of one or more external devices does not include a personal mobile electronic device (eg, 604, 634, 684) (eg, smartphone, cell phone, watch). In some embodiments, the personal mobile electronic device is not included in the first set of one or more devices and is not included in the second set of one or more devices. In some embodiments, the set of external devices comprises a personal mobile electronic device, so that the audio messages transmitted from the first user interface are sent to the personal mobile electronic device (and optionally other mobile devices that are part of the home). do. In some embodiments, audio messages transmitted from the second user interface (or any user interface corresponding to the sub-location) are not transmitted to the personal mobile electronic device (and optionally, other mobile devices that are also part of the home). not sent to ). In some embodiments, the computer system does not allow assigning personal mobile electronic devices to any sub-location of a higher level location, but does allow assigning personal mobile electronic devices to a higher level location. Thus, in some embodiments, selecting the second selectable user interface object records an audio message and does not involve a personal mobile electronic device (or any other personal mobile electronic devices that are members of a higher level location). Disclose a process for transmitting to a second set of one or more devices.

In some embodiments, the computer system, subsequent to displaying the second user interface, generates an input (eg, 750q ) to disable sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices (eg, 638 ). ) (eg, user input; input on the settings user interface). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the input to disable sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, the computer system causes selection of a first selectable user interface object (eg, 726 ) via (eg, without disabling sending audio messages to the first set of one or more external devices via selection of a first selectable user interface object) and a second selectable user interface object (eg, 776) Disable (eg, 768a) sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices via selection of . In some embodiments, after disabling sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, navigating back to the first user interface and receiving selection of the first selectable user interface object comprises: A process for recording a message and transmitting an audio message to a first set of one or more external devices without transmitting the audio message to a second set of one or more external devices is disclosed. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the input to disable sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, the computer system receives the second set of one or more external devices from the set of external devices. Remove. In some embodiments, after disabling sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, navigating back to the second user interface and receiving selection of a second selectable user interface object comprises: It does not initiate a process for recording a message and sending it to any devices. In some embodiments, after disabling sending audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, the second user interface does not include the second selectable user interface object (or selectable of the user interface object) disabled/disabled versions), the process for recording and transmitting the audio message to the second set of one or more external devices cannot be initiated.

In some embodiments, the first user interface corresponds to a higher-level location (eg, 602 ) (eg, a structure such as a house) and the second user interface corresponds to a lower-level location (eg, 602 ) of the higher-level location (eg, 602 ). 602a to 602d) (eg, a room of a house, an area of a house). In some embodiments, the computer system (eg, while not displaying the first user interface and not displaying the second user interface), at a microphone in communication with the computer system (eg, a microphone of the computer system), to the digital assistant receive 808 audio input (eg, 792a - 792e) comprising a natural language request for , a location identifier (e.g., a higher level location, a lower location), and an audio message (e.g., received subsequent to an instruction to initiate a process for sending the audio message and/or received subsequent to the identifier of the location); . In some embodiments, upon determining that the location identifier corresponds to a higher level location (eg, 782a ), the computer system configures a list of external devices including a first set of one or more external devices and a second set of one or more external devices. Sends an audio message for playback in a set, without establishing a two-way audio communication channel with any devices in the set of external devices (eg, without establishing a full-duplex audio communication channel). Do 810 (eg, multicast). In some embodiments, upon determining that the location identifier corresponds to a sub-location (eg, 792b, 792c), the computer system causes a second of one or more external devices rather than for playback in the first set of one or more external devices. For playback in the two sets, send 812 (eg, multicast) the audio message without establishing a two-way audio communication channel with any devices in the set of external devices. In some embodiments, the computer system sends the location identifier with the audio message so that the remote device (eg, service, external device of the set of external devices) sends the audio message to external devices corresponding to the respective external devices. make it possible to distribute

In some embodiments, as part of initiating a process for recording and transmitting an audio message to external devices, the computer (eg, by replacing all or part of the second user interface) records the user interface (eg, 730 ) , 740 , 750 , wherein the history user interface includes: a history user interface object (eg, 736 ) (eg, a selectable record button) - a selection (eg, 750c ) of a history user interface object (eg, tap on it to press end when the audio message is complete, to press and hold on it while speaking the audio message, to tap on it and to allow the computer system to identify the end of the audio message) detected by the computer system by recording audio causing the recording of an audio message; and send user interface object (eg, 756) (eg, selectable send button)—selection (eg, 750e) (eg, tap on) of a second user interface object causes the computer system to send the audio message to external devices. to transmit to - at the same time. In some embodiments, the recording user interface may also include a location of a location corresponding to external devices to which the audio message is to be transmitted (eg, a high level location, a low location; text specifying the name of a room or area to which the audio message is to be transmitted). display (eg, text display, graphic display) simultaneously.

In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more input devices including a microphone. In some embodiments, as part of a process (eg, user interfaces 730 , 740 , 750 ) for recording and transmitting a first audio message to a set of external devices, the computer system, via a microphone, Receive audio input. In some embodiments, the computer system sends a first audio message to a set of external devices, wherein the first audio message is based on (eg, includes a recording thereof) a second audio input.

Note that the details of the processes described above with respect to method 800 (eg, FIGS. 8A and 8B ) are also applicable in a manner similar to the methods described below. For example, method 800 optionally includes one or more of the features of various methods described below with reference to methods 1000 and 1200 . For example, the computer systems may be identical systems. For another example, the audio message sent in method 800 may be media received at 1000 . As another example, the voice input transmitted in method 1200 may be the same as media received in method 1000 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

9A-9X illustrate example devices and example user interfaces for displaying notifications, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 10 .

The phrases “multicast message” and/or “audio multicast message” refer to a device using techniques similar to those described in FIGS. 7A-7A , 8A-8B, 11A-11F, and 12 . 9A-9X are used interchangeably herein to refer to multicast messages transmitted from However, multicast messages and/or audio multicast messages, as used herein, are not necessarily intended to include multicast communications transmitted using other features of device 700 .

9A illustrates an electronic device 700 displaying a user interface 900 . In FIG. 9A , electronic device 700 is a portable multifunction device and has one or more components described above with respect to one or more of devices 100 , 200 , 300 , 500 . With reference to the figures described below, in some embodiments, device 700 is operating at a location less than a threshold distance from home 602 ; In other embodiments, device 700 is operating at a location that is more than a threshold distance from home 602 .

As illustrated in FIG. 9A , user interface 900 is a settings user interface corresponding to a home application, as discussed above (eg, in FIGS. 6 and 7A-7A ). Here, the Settings user interface is configured for Cam Appleseed, a person registered with device 700 (eg, a user), and a person recognized by the home application (eg, a group of people 797a in FIG. 7A ). field page. As illustrated in FIG. 9A , device 700 is currently configured to receive multicast notifications, which is illustrated in FIG. 9A by multicast option 900a being enabled. Because multicast option 900a is enabled, multicast notifications will be received by device 700 as illustrated in FIGS. 9B-9X . In some embodiments, device 700 detects tap gesture 950a at a location corresponding to multicast option 900a. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture 950a (or one or more subsequent tap gestures), the device 700 changes the multicast option 900a from an enabled state to a disabled state. and device 700 is not configured to receive multicast messages transmitted based on the flows described herein. Accordingly, in some embodiments, device 700 does not receive multicast messages when multicast option 900a is disabled.

9B-9H illustrate that multicast notifications and non-multicast notifications are displayed over a period of time while multicast option 900a is enabled. In particular, FIGS. 9B-9H show that multicast notifications (eg, a multicast message transmitted using the methods described herein) directed to (eg, corresponding to) a specific target group of devices, also It illustrates that display stops or is attenuated (eg, after a predetermined period of time) unless a new multicast notification directed to a specific target group is received within a predetermined period of time. In some embodiments, a particular target group of devices is a house (eg, home 602 in FIG. 6 ), a room (eg, dining room 602b , bedroom 602c in FIG. 6 ), or an area (eg, for example, A group of devices assigned to an “entertainment zone” (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 7u).

For example, in FIG. 9B , at 10:00 AM, device 700 receives data indicating that updated content has been published by a news application.

As illustrated in FIG. 9B , in response to receiving the data, device 700 displays a user interface that includes a news notification 902 . In FIG. 9B , news notification 902 is not a multicast notification. Accordingly, the news notification 902 is displayed regardless of whether the multicast option 900a is enabled or disabled. In other words, the state of the multicast option 900a does not affect the news notification 902 because it is not a multicast notification.

At 10:02 AM, device 700 indicates that a new audio multicast message has been sent to home 602 (“home target group”) (eg, directed to devices including electronic device 700 ). receive data. In some embodiments, the data includes a target group identifier (eg, “Home”) as a receiver for the new audio multicast message.

As illustrated in FIG. 9C , in response to receiving the data, the device 700 displays a multicast notification 904 indicating the data received at 10:02 AM. In FIG. 9C , multicast notification 904 is displayed concurrently with news notification 902 . The multicast notification 904 includes an application indication 904a, a notification type indication 904b, a sender indication 904c, a target indication 904d, and a reception time indication 904e.

Application indication 904a indicates the application that is providing the notification. Here, the application display 904a includes a graphical representation icon assigned to the home application and similar to the home icon 704a of FIG. 7A .

The notification type indication 904b indicates the notification type of the notification. Here, the notification type is a multicast notification.

Caller ID 904c indicates the originator of the audio multicast message. Here, the sender is John, the person registered with the device (eg, the device in the home target group) that initiated the process for sending the audio multicast message. In some embodiments, when the caller is a person, the identity of the caller is established by one or more devices that analyze the voice input corresponding to the audio multicast messages, using one or more voice identification algorithms. In some embodiments, when the identity of the sender cannot be established as a person, the sender indication 904c indicates that the sender is the same device that sent the audio multicast message (eg, a “Living Speaker”). In some embodiments, the sender is not established as a person, e.g., the person is not registered with the sender device initiating the process for sending the audio multicast message and/or multiple people receive the audio multicast message. A person is not established at the sender device when registered with the device initiating the process for transmitting.

Target indication 904d indicates the target group of devices to which the audio multicast message corresponds. Here, the target indication 904d is a home target group (eg, “From Home”). In some embodiments, the target group (corresponding to the audio multicast message) is the target group of the audio multicast message, as described above with respect to FIGS. 7E-7F, 7J-7M, and 7S-7U. A group identified by the sender. In some embodiments, the target group is selected by the sender of audio multicast messages based on one or more user inputs (eg, voice input (eg, 792a - 729d) and/or gestures (eg, 750b, 750g3)). identified. In some embodiments, the target group is identified based on the initial audio multicast message when a reply message is received at device 700 . For example, device 700 may be configured to respond to bedroom 602c in certain circumstances, such as when device 700 previously directed an initial audio multicast message to a group of devices assigned to bedroom 602c. Receive a reply audio multicast message with the target group.

Reception time indication 904e indicates when the notification was displayed (or, in some embodiments, when data corresponding to the notification was received). Here, the reception time indication 904e shows that the notification was displayed at “NOW” or 10:02 AM.

As illustrated in FIG. 9D , at 10:09 AM, device 700 continues to display news notification 902 and stops displaying multicast notification 904 . In some embodiments, notification 904 is not displayed on any user interface of device 700 after the multicast notification ceases to be displayed. In some embodiments, notification 904 is not displayed on the user interface of FIG. 9D at any other time after the multicast notification ceases to be displayed. In some embodiments, the device receives user input to view pending notifications (eg, notifications for which the user has not taken action) and, in response, receives a news notification ( 904 ) without displaying a multicast notification 904 . 902) is displayed.

As illustrated in FIG. 9D , the device 700 stops displaying the multicast notification 904 (even when the display is on) because the device 700 stops displaying a new audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group. This is because data was not received before (and/or within a predetermined period of time) the attenuation period (eg, 1 second, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 300 seconds, etc.) of the multicast notification 904 expires. On the other hand, device 700 continues to display news notification 902 because news notification 902 is not a multicast notification and stops being displayed after a predetermined period of time (and when the display is on). because it won't

9E-9H illustrate examples of the technique, in addition to the example described above with respect to FIGS. 9B-9D . 9B-9D , the attenuation period (eg, a predetermined period) for the multicast notification is 5 minutes for illustrative purposes only. In some embodiments, the decay period is shorter or longer than 5 minutes.

At 10:10, device 700 receives three different sets of data. The first set of data indicates that a new audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group has been received. The second set of data indicates that a new audio multicast message has been received corresponding to the group of devices assigned to bedroom 602c (“bedroom target group”). The third set of data is a new audio multiplayer corresponding to a group of devices assigned to an entertainment zone ("entertainment zone target group") (eg, a combination of groups of devices assigned to living room 602d and solarium 602e). Indicates that a cast message has been received.

In some embodiments, the first set of data indicates an initial audio multicast message or a reply audio multicast message (eg, a reply to the initial audio multicast message sent by device 700 ) corresponding to the home target group. . In some embodiments, the second set of data and the third set of data are audio received in response to reply audio multicast messages, ie, initial audio multicast messages transmitted individually to each respective target group. Indicates multicast messages. In some embodiments, the second set of data and the third set of data are not initial messages received from their respective target groups because (eg, FIGS. 7M, 7T, 7V, and 7X) As discussed above, the device 700 is not assigned to a zone or room target groups and cannot receive initial messages sent from those target groups.

As illustrated in FIG. 9E , in response to receiving the three sets of data, device 700 displays multicast notifications 906a , 908a , 910 . Device 700 also continues to display news notification 902 . As illustrated in FIG. 9E , notifications are displayed in a notification list. The oldest notifications are displayed at the bottom of the list (eg, news notifications 902 ), and the newest notifications are at the top of the list (eg, multicast notifications 910 ). Accordingly, while notifications 906a, 908a, and 910 were displayed approximately simultaneously, notifications 906a, 908a, and 910 were each displayed in the order shown in FIG. 9E . In some embodiments, notifications are displayed in a different order or in a different arrangement.

As illustrated in FIG. 9E , notification 906a indicates that an audio multicast message was sent by “John” from the home target group; notification 908a indicates that an audio multicast message was sent by “Jane” from the bedroom target group; Notification 910 indicates that an audio multicast message was sent by “Emma” from the entertainment zone target group. As illustrated in FIG. 9E , all three new multicast notifications include an indication of reception time of “Now” because the data was recently received at 10:10 AM (or if they were recently displayed). ) Because. However, the reception time indication for the news notification 902 is “10 MINS AGO (10 minutes ago)” because its data was received (or the notification was displayed) at 10:00.

At 10:11 AM, the device 700 receives data indicating that a new audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group has been received.

As illustrated in FIG. 9F , in response to receiving the new data, device 700 displays a multicast notification 906b because data representing a new audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group ( For example, data received at 10:11) may be determined before the attenuation period for the multicast notification 906a expires (eg, after displaying the multicast notification 906a in FIG. 9E or after receiving the first data). received within the period). In particular, the device 700 does not update the display of the notifications 906a , 910 and continues to display these notifications because data representing a new audio multicast message corresponding to their respective target groups has not been received. and their attenuation period has not expired (eg, they have not been displayed for more than 5 minutes without receiving data corresponding to a new multicast message for their target groups).

Multicast notification 906b is an updated version of multicast notification 906a that device 700 has stopped displaying in FIG. 9F . Referring again to FIG. 9E , multicast notification 906a indicates that John has sent a multicast message corresponding to the home target group. Referring again to FIG. 9F , multicast notification 906b also includes information (eg, that John has sent a previous multicast message corresponding to the home target group (the multicast message originally represented by notification 906a )). "John" in notification 906b). In addition, the multicast notification 906b includes information that another person has sent a multicast message corresponding to the home target group. Thus, the multicast notification 906b contains information about two audio multicast messages, i.e., the multicast notification 906b is the originator (“John”) of the first audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group. ), and information indicating a sender (eg, “another person”) of the second audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group.

As illustrated in FIG. 9F , multicast notification 906b is displayed at the top of the list with an indication of reception time of now, since it is the most recent notification. In particular, although the multicast notification 906a was first displayed at 10:10 AM in FIG. 9E (or data corresponding to the multicast notification 906a was first received), a new audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group The reception time indication of the multicast notification 906b in FIG. 9F is changed to reflect the time at which A was received (eg, data received at 10:11). In some embodiments, the multicast notification 906a is displayed concurrently with the multicast notification 906b. In some embodiments, when multicast notification 906a is displayed concurrently with multicast notification 906b, the reception time indication of multicast notification 906a is updated to read "NOW". In some embodiments, updating the time indication of the multicast notification 906a extends the decay period of the multicast notification 906a. In some embodiments, receiving the data in FIG. 9F includes an attenuation period of the multicast notification 906a (eg, an audio multicast message in which the multicast notification 906b is represented by the multicast notification 906a ). The content of the multicast notification 906a) is extended because it includes the content indicated.

As illustrated in FIG. 9F , below multicast notification 906b are notifications 910 , 908a , 902 , respectively listed from most recent to least recent. In addition, the reception time indications of notifications 910 , 908a , 902 are shown in FIG. 9F to reflect the length of time each respectively displayed (or the amount of time that has elapsed since data corresponding to each respective notification was received). updated from

At 10:12 AM, device 700 receives data indicating that a new audio multicast message has been received corresponding to the bedroom target group.

As illustrated in FIG. 9G , in response to receiving the data, device 700 displays a multicast notification 908b because data representing a new audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group (eg, , data received at 10:12) before the attenuation period for the multicast notification 908b expires (eg, after displaying the multicast notification 906b in FIG. 9E or after receiving the second data) a predetermined period of time within) was received. In particular, device 700 continues to display notifications 908b, 910 without updating notifications 908b, 910 because data representing a new audio multicast message corresponding to their respective target groups. is not received and their attenuation period has not expired. In some embodiments, the multicast notification 908b is displayed using techniques similar to those described above in FIG. 9F with respect to the multicast notification 906b.

Multicast notification 908b is an updated version of multicast notification 908a that device 700 has stopped displaying in FIG. 9G . Referring again to FIG. 9E , multicast notification 908a indicates that Jane has sent a multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group. Referring again to FIG. 9G , multicast notification 908b indicates that two multicast messages corresponding to the bedroom target group were sent by Jane. Here, instead of the multicast notification 908b containing the new sender, the multicast notification 908b contains content representing an increased amount of notifications sent by the respective sender as compared to the multicast notification 908a. Display. In some embodiments, multicast notification 908a includes a representation of the amount of notifications received from the bedroom target group, regardless of whether a different sender has sent a new multicast message.

As illustrated in FIG. 9H , multicast notification 908b is displayed at the top of the list, and notifications 906b , 910 , 902 are ordered from most recent to least recent multicast notification 908b . ) is displayed below.

As illustrated in FIG. 9H , at 10:15 AM, the device 700 stops displaying the multicast notification 910 because the attenuation period for the multicast notification 910 has expired. In other words, device 700 is configured within a predetermined amount of time (or notification ( 910 ), data indicating a new audio multicast message corresponding to the target group of multicast notification 910 (eg, “entertainment zone”) has not been received. As such, with reference to FIG. 9E , device 700 provides content representative of a first set of data (eg, John in multicast notification 906b), and content representative of a second set of data (eg, multicast notification). one of the multicasts in 908b) and no longer display the content representing the third set of data (eg, multicast notification 910) because the first and second sets of data The data corresponding to the respective target group indicated in the third set of data was received before the decay period of the respective respective notification expired, while the data corresponding to the target group indicated in the third set of data was not received in the multicast notification 910 . This is because it was not received before the end of the decay period.

9I-9P illustrate user interfaces for playback of received audio multicast messages. In particular, FIGS. 9I-9K illustrate a scenario in which multiple audio multicast messages are automatically played in response to a single input. Furthermore, FIGS. 9L-9P illustrate a scenario in which one received audio multicast message is selected from a group of other received audio multicast messages and played back. In FIG. 9H , device 700 detects tap gesture 950h at a location corresponding to multicast notification 906b .

As illustrated in FIG. 9I , in response to detecting the tap gesture 950h , the device 700 displays the user interface 920 . The user interface 920 displays the audio multicast messages indicated in the multicast notification 906b, which are audio multicast messages corresponding to the home target group (as shown by “MULTICAST FROM HOME” in FIG. 9I ). user interface for The user interface 920 includes a graphical caller indication 924a and a graphical caller indication 924b, each representing one of the audio multicast messages represented in the multicast notification 906b. Here, the graphical caller indicator 924a is larger than the graphical caller indicator 924b and is centered on the user interface, indicating that the audio multicast message corresponding to the graphical caller indicator 924a is currently selected for playback. Graphical caller indication 924a is an image of a speaker device and represents data corresponding to an audio multicast message sent by “another person,” received at 10:11 AM in FIG. 9F . And, graphical caller ID 924b is an image of John (ie, 797a comprising an image of John A. in Figure 7ab), and an audio multicast sent by John, received at 10:10 am in Figure 9e. Indicates data corresponding to the message. In some embodiments, the audio messages are displayed in the order in which they were received (eg, graphical sender indication 924b and graphical sender indication 924b are switched in FIG. 9E ). User interface 920 further includes a current caller indicator 922a (or largest graphical caller indicator) indicating the name assigned to the speaker or device displayed in the middle of the user interface. Here, the current caller indication 922a indicates that the speaker has the name “Living Room” and that an audio multicast message from the caller is currently playing or can be currently played by selection of the play affordance 926 . indicates. In addition, the device 700 also displays a remaining indication 928 showing that the currently selected audio multicast message has a length of 10 seconds that can be played, and a total of two audios for which the selected audio multicast message corresponds to the home target group. Display a count indication 930 indicating that it is message 1 of the multicast messages. In some embodiments, when the setting is enabled to allow transcription of an audio multicast message, user interface 920 includes a textual representation of the currently selected audio multicast message.

As illustrated in FIG. 9I , device 700 receives data indicating that a new audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group has been received, and displays a multicast notification 940 in response to receiving the data. In some embodiments, device 700 updates the list of notifications based on this received data, as discussed with respect to FIG. 9L below. In FIG. 9I , device 700 receives tap gesture 950i at a location corresponding to playback affordance 926 .

9J and 9K , in response to detecting tap gesture 950i , device 700 initiates playback of the media. As illustrated in FIG. 9J , the device 700 plays the last received (eg, received at 10:11 in FIG. 9F above) audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group. 9J , while playing the currently selected audio multicast message (eg, an audio multicast message from “another person” received at 10:11), device 700 displays time indication 932 and , update the indications 928 , 930 . As illustrated in FIG. 9K , device 700 is currently playing a first audio multicast message (eg, received at 10:10 from John in FIG. 9E above) corresponding to the home target group. In particular, the device 700 automatically (eg, without receiving an additional input after detecting the tap gesture 950i) after completing playback of the last audio multicast message corresponding to the home target group first audio multicast message Play the cast message.

As illustrated in FIG. 9L , shortly after displaying the user interface in FIG. 9K , device 700 redisplays the list of notifications. Here, notification 902b has ceased to be displayed. In some embodiments, notification 902b has ceased to be displayed because a gesture was detected at a location corresponding to the notification and/or one or more of the audio multicast messages were played in FIGS. 9J and 9K . am. In some embodiments, notification 902b ceases to be displayed because its decay period ended (eg, at 10:16 AM) before a new multicast corresponding to the home target group was received. am.

In FIG. 9L , device 700 is also displaying multicast notification 908c and has stopped displaying multicast notification 908b. Multicast notification 908c is an updated version of multicast notification 908b updated with reference data corresponding to the audio multicast message received in FIG. 9I , represented by multicast notification 940 in FIG. 9I . . Thus, multicast notification 908b contained content indicating that two multicast notifications corresponding to the bedroom target group were received, whereas multicast notification 908c indicated that three multicast notifications corresponding to the bedroom target group were received. Updated to include the content that represents it. In FIG. 9L , device 700 detects a press-and-hold gesture 950l at a location corresponding to multicast notification 908c. In some embodiments, the device 700 detects the press-and-hold gesture 950l while it continues to be detected (or held). In some embodiments, device 700 detects the press-and-hold gesture after it is released.

As illustrated in FIG. 9M , in response to detecting the press-and-hold gesture 950l, device 700 continues to detect the press-and-hold gesture 950l (eg, press-and-hold gesture 950l). after the end of ) display the user interface 960 . User interface 960 includes user interface elements similar to user interface 920 (as discussed above with respect to FIGS. 9I-9K ). However, user interface 960 has a smaller area than user interface 920 . Although user interface 960 is a user interface for playing audio multicast messages from a bedroom target group, device 700 may use one or more techniques as described above with respect to user interface 920 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 950m1 on open affordance 962 , device 700 stops displaying user interface 960 and is similar in size to user interface 920 . Displays the user interface. 9M , device 700 detects swipe gesture 950m2 at a location corresponding to user interface 960 .

As illustrated in FIG. 9N , in response to detecting the first gesture (eg, swipe gesture 950m2 ), device 700 sends the currently selected audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group (eg, its The second to last received audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group (eg, its corresponding data was received in FIG. 9G ) from the last received audio multicast message whose corresponding data was received in FIG. 9I ) change to In FIG. 9N , device 700 detects swipe gesture 950n at a location corresponding to user interface 960 .

As illustrated in FIG. 9O , in response to detecting the second gesture (eg, swipe gesture 950n ), device 700 sends the currently selected audio multicast message corresponding to (eg, its The first received audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group (eg, its corresponding data was received in FIG. 9E ) from the second to last received audio multicast message whose corresponding data was received in FIG. 9F ) change to In FIG. 9O , device 700 detects tap gesture 950o at a location corresponding to user interface 960 (eg, on playback affordance 926 ).

As illustrated in FIG. 9P , in response to detecting tap gesture 950o , device 700 , without initiating playback of other audio multicast messages, first received (eg, , start playback of the currently selected) audio multicast message. In some embodiments, in FIG. 9P (or 9I and 9J ), device 700 detects tap gesture 950p at a location corresponding to multicast affordance 736 ; In response to detecting the tap gesture 950p at a location corresponding to the multicast affordance 736 , the device 700 connects one or more input devices, as described above (eg, in FIGS. 7C and 7I ). Through, start recording media. In some embodiments, in FIG. 9P , device 700 detects one or more voice inputs, such as voice input 720a (as described above), and sends an audio multicast message corresponding to the bedroom target group to Play to Jane.

9Q-9V illustrate example user interfaces for displaying the user interfaces described above on a device having a smaller display than device 700 , such as smartwatch 701 . Any of the user interfaces discussed above can be applied to smartwatch 701 (eg, user interfaces 970 , 972 , 974 , 976 ) using one or more techniques similar to those discussed above with respect to FIGS. 9A-9P . , 978 , 980 (or tablet 634 ) and transitioned.

9W and 9X illustrate example user interfaces for displaying the user interfaces described above on a device, such as computer device 674 . As described above, computer device 674, in some embodiments, communicates with one or more devices that transmit instructions to computer device 674 to display one or more user interfaces. Any of the user interfaces discussed above may be displayed on the computer device 674 (eg, user interfaces 996 and 998 ) using one or more techniques similar to those discussed above with respect to FIGS. 9A-9P . It can be displayed and transitioned.

10 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying notifications using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1000 is performed at a computer system (eg, 100 , 300 , 500 , 634 , 674 , 700 , 701 , 850 ) in communication with a display generating component. Some operations of the method 1000 are selectively combined, the orders of some operations are selectively changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

As described below, method 1000 provides an intuitive method for displaying notifications. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user of viewing notifications, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, allowing a user to access notifications faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

The computer system receives ( 1002 ) first data corresponding to a first media.

The computer system (eg, in response to receiving the first data) via the display generation component, causes the presentation of the first media (eg, 904b , 904c ) until the end of the first period of time (eg, the first predetermined period of time). ) (eg, 906a, 908a, 910) (eg, a notification corresponding to the first data) (eg, a notification selectable to initiate a process for playing the first media) ( 1004 ) .

After receiving the first data (eg, after initiation of display of the first notification), the computer system receives ( 1006 ) second data corresponding to the second media, where the second media (eg, FIG. 9J ) 932 of is different from the first media (eg, 932 of FIG. 9K ).

The computer system, in response to determining that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria (and in some embodiments, a criterion that the one or more criteria are met when the second media is directed to the same target group as the first media) and a determination based on (1) the time the second data was received and (2) the time the first data was received (eg, the second data is received within a predefined amount of time after the first data is received) (eg, in response to receiving the second data), display 1008 (eg, in response to receiving the second data) until the end of the second period of time (1008). In some embodiments, the second period of time is based on receipt of the second data. In some embodiments, the second period of time is not based on receipt of the first data. In some embodiments, the second period of time is a second predetermined period of time (eg, an indication (eg, 906b (eg, “John”)), 908b (eg, “2”) of the first media (eg, 932 in FIG. 9K ). A second notification (eg, 906b, 908b, 908c) (eg, a notification corresponding to at least first data) (eg, a notification selectable to initiate a process for playing at least the first media) (eg, an indication of , at least a notice indicating receipt of the first data)), wherein the end of the first period differs from the end of the second period. In some embodiments, the second notification is the first notification. In some embodiments, the second notification is different from the first notification (eg, the second notification is a notification combining (1) information corresponding to the first media and (2) information corresponding to the second media) . In some embodiments, the second notification is displayed (eg, initially displayed) after the first period of time. In some embodiments, when the reception of the second media occurs within a predetermined time of reception of the first media, the length of time for which information corresponding to the first media is displayed is extended. In some embodiments, the second period of time is determined based on a difference between when the first data was received and when the second data was received. In some embodiments, the media (eg, first media, second media) is an audio message that was recorded in another device and sent to a group of devices including a computer system that receives the first data and the second data. In some embodiments, the set of one or more criteria is met when the second media is received before the end of a display period of the first media (eg, a duration for which a notification is valid, a duration for which a notification will be displayed in the set of notifications). Includes standards. In some embodiments, the set of one or more criteria is determined prior to ceasing to display the first notification (eg, through activating the first notification, through receiving a user input that clears the first notification) the second media. contains the criteria that are met when the is received. Dynamically displaying a second notification comprising an indication included in the first notification associated with the second notification when a predetermined criterion is met provides feedback to the user regarding the relationship between the second notification and the first notification; Further, even when the first notification is stopped from being displayed, the indication included in the first notification is allowed to continue to be displayed. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first notification (eg, 906a ) is being displayed at the time the second data is received (eg, in accordance with a determination that the second media meets a set of one or more criteria). In some embodiments, as part of displaying the second notification (eg, 906b ), the computer system stops displaying the first notification (eg, in FIG. 9E ). In some embodiments, upon determining that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria (and in some embodiments, the one or more criteria are met when the second media is directed to the same target group as the first media) and cease displaying the first notification according to a determination that the second data was received within a predefined amount of time after the first data was received. Ceasing to display the first notification when the second notification includes information regarding the first notification provides feedback regarding the information in the first notification to the user without disrupting the user interface. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system and/or interacting with the computer system) and user-system It makes the interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first media is a first audio message (eg, 932 in FIG. 9K ) (eg, an audio message recorded at an external device (using a microphone) and sent by the external device to the group of devices, a computer audio messages directed to (eg, sent to) a plurality of external devices, including the system. In some embodiments, the second audio message is a second audio message directed to (or sent to) a second plurality of external devices (eg, the same as the plurality of external devices, different from the plurality of external devices). am. Displaying a notification associated with the multicasted audio messages provides the user with visual feedback regarding the type of notification, which allows the user to identify that the notification will be attenuated and needs to be responded to within a predetermined time period. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first notification (eg, 904 ) is of a group of a plurality of external devices to which the first media (eg, 932 of FIG. 9K ) is directed (eg, to which first data corresponding to the media has been sent). an indication (eg, 904d). In some embodiments, the first data identifies a group of the plurality of external devices to which the first media is directed. In some embodiments, the plurality of external devices comprises a computer system. Displaying a notification comprising an indication of the group of devices to which the first media is directed provides feedback to the user regarding the devices that have sent and/or will receive the play message. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, in response to receiving the first data, the computer system sends notifications (eg, FIG. add to the set of (eg, the set of notifications accessible for display, displayed in response to a user input requesting to display the set of notifications, which is a list of recent notifications) . In some embodiments, upon reaching the end of the first period of time, the computer system removes the first notification (eg, 904 ) from the set of notifications. In some embodiments, prior to the end of the first period of time, upon receiving second data corresponding to the second media, and upon determining that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria, the computer system sets the set of notifications remove the first notification (eg, 906a) from Add a second notification (eg, 906b) to the set of notifications. In some embodiments, prior to the end of the first predetermined period of time, upon receiving data corresponding to the media, and upon determining that the second media does not meet the set of one or more criteria, a first notification from the set of notifications Adds a second notification to the set of notifications without removing . In some embodiments, the computer system removes the first notification from the set of notifications as a display termination condition is met for the first notification. Choosing to remove a notification when additional data associated with the notification (eg, updates or new media) has not been received within a predetermined period of time, without requiring the user to manually delete the notifications, may cause the device to clutter the UI. Allows users to avoid providing stale notifications (eg, outdated, irrelevant) to the user. Performing an optimized action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, helps the user to provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with a computer system and reduces user errors) ) improves the operability of the computer system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and shortens the battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently. improve

In some embodiments, the first data identifies a target group of a plurality of external devices to which the first media was directed (eg, sent to). In some embodiments, a notification corresponding to the first media (eg, 906a, 908a, 910) (eg, first notification) (eg, and which, when the notification is activated, message), the computer system receives ( 1010 ) third data corresponding to the third media. In some embodiments, in response to receiving 1012 third data corresponding to the third media and upon determining that the third media satisfies a set of one or more criteria (wherein, in some embodiments, The one or more criteria include criteria that are met when the media is directed to a target group of devices that are the same as the first media), and the computer system causes a notification (eg, first notification, second notification) corresponding to the first media (eg, first notification, second notification) , and which, when the notification is activated, extends the duration 1014 (eg, 906b in FIG. 9F ) for which the first media (eg, initiating a process for playing the first audio message) is displayed). In some embodiments, in response to receiving ( 1012 ) third data corresponding to the third media and in accordance with a determination that the third media does not satisfy the set of one or more criteria (eg, the third media is the first directed to a different set of target devices compared to the media), the computer system withholds extending 1016 the duration for which a notification corresponding to the first media is displayed (eg, 908a, 910 in FIG. 9F ). In some embodiments, as the computer system receives additional data corresponding to the media meeting the one or more sets of criteria, the device causes the immediately preceding notification that was displayed in response to the media meeting the one or more sets of criteria to be displayed. Notifications continue to extend the duration that they are displayed via the display creation component, as long as they have not yet ceased to be displayed based on reaching the end of the period. Thus, as audio messages are directed to and received on the same set of target devices (eg, external devices), unless the most recently received audio message reaches a corresponding predetermined period for display, such audio message Notifications about their chain are still displayed. Selecting whether to extend the attenuation period for a notification based on whether updated information associated with the notification has been received for a predetermined period of time, without requiring the user to manually update/delete notifications, causes the device to clutter the UI Allows to provide new (eg, new, relevant) notifications to the user while avoiding providing the user with stale notifications (eg, old, irrelevant) that would otherwise be annoying. Performing an optimized action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, helps the user to provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with a computer system and reduces user errors) ) improves the operability of the computer system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and shortens the battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently. improve

In some embodiments, upon determining that the second media meets the set of one or more criteria, the second notification (eg, meeting the set of one or more criteria) causes the first media, represented by the second notification, to and an indicator (eg, number) based on (eg, representing) the number (eg, number of audio messages) (eg, in 908a and 908b) of the media it contains. In some embodiments, each subsequent notification after a first notification in the chain of notifications includes an indication of the number of media (eg, number of audio messages) represented by the notification being displayed. For example, if the notification is the 5th notification in the chain, the notification indicates that the notification corresponds to 5 received media (eg, 5 audio messages). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second media does not satisfy the set of one or more criteria, a second notification (eg, meeting a set of one or more criteria) is represented by the second notification. does not include an indicator (eg, a number) that is based on (eg, represents) the number of media (eg, the number of audio messages) that includes Updating the indication of the number of media items (audio multicast message (eg, audio message multicast to one or more devices)) received from a target group of devices may include a media item received for a respective target group of devices. Provides feedback to the user regarding the current status of their number. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the second notification comprises an indication of the first media. In some embodiments, while displaying the second notification (eg, 602b), the computer system receives input for the second notification (eg, 950h). In some embodiments, in response to receiving input for the second notification (eg, and in accordance with a determination that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria), the computer system selects the first media and the second media. Initiate a process for playing (eg, 920 , 922 in FIGS. 9I and 9J ) (eg, displaying a user interface for playing the first and second media, the first media and subsequently the second media) starts playing). In some embodiments, initiating the process for playing the first and second media automatically (eg, in response to receiving input for a second notification without intervening user input) the first media and subsequently playing the second media and displaying a user interface (eg, 741 ) for playing the first media. In some embodiments, in response to receiving an input for the second notification and upon determining that the second media does not meet the set of one or more criteria, play the second media without playing the first media As part of initiating a process for (eg, displaying a user interface for playing the second media rather than the first media) for Start playback. In some embodiments, upon determining that the second media does not meet the set of one or more criteria and while displaying the first notification, the computer system receives an input for the first notification, the input for the first notification In response to receiving the , initiate a process for playing the first media without playing the second media.

In some embodiments, the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria (eg, the second media is directed to the same external devices as the first media). In some embodiments, while displaying the second notification (eg, 908c), the computer system receives an input for the second notification (eg, 9501). In some embodiments, in response to receiving input for the second notification (eg, and in accordance with a determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria), the computer system (eg, the first media and the second 2 display a user interface (eg, 960 ) for playing the first media (eg, as part of initiating the process for playing the media), wherein the user interface for playing the first media is a record user interface object (eg, , a selectable record button). In some embodiments, the selection (eg, 950p) of the record (eg, 736) user interface object may result in a first group (eg, eg, 950p) of a plurality of external devices to which the first data is directed (eg, transmitted) to the first media. , bedroom devices), a process (eg, 730 , 740 , 750 ) for causing the computer system to send an audio message to the first group of the plurality of external devices (eg, rather than the second group). to initiate In some embodiments, the selection (eg, 950p) of the record (eg, 736) user interface object may result in a plurality of external devices directed to (eg, transmitted to) the first media, the first data being different from the first group. In accordance with a determination to identify a second group of (eg, home devices) of 780a, 784, 786a). In some embodiments, the computer system detects selection (eg, taps, presses, and holds on) the historical user interface object and, in response to detecting the selection of the historical user interface object, as described above, Similarly, the corresponding action is initiated. In some embodiments, the set of external devices is a higher level location (or destination) (eg, a first type of location) (eg, a home location, a business, an office (eg, a location that is a higher level location (eg, a higher level location)). one or more locations (e.g., sub-locations) and/or one or more areas (or zones) within the area and/or perimeter defined by the location of location, one or more locations (eg, sub-locations) and/or a location that is (eg, programmatically) linked to one or more regions (or regions)))). In some embodiments, initiating a process for transmitting the audio message includes recording the audio message by recording audio detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the user interface for playing the first media is an indication (eg, a textual representation, a graphical representation) of a group (eg, a higher level location, a lower location) (eg, a room or area in which the audio message is to be sent). text specifying the name).

In some embodiments, while displaying a user interface (eg, 960 ) for playing the first media (eg, as part of initiating a process for playing the first media and the second media), the computer system: Receive user input (eg, 950i, 950m2, 950n) (eg, via one or more input devices, using a touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the user input and the user input (eg, 950i ) is a selection of a playback user interface object (eg, on a play button displayed as part of a user interface for playing the first media) tab), the computer system plays the first media (and optionally automatically subsequently plays the second media, and switches to the user interface for playing the second media). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the user input and wherein the user input is a swipe gesture (eg, 950m2, 950n) for a user interface to play the first media (eg, the user to play the first media) In response to a determination of a left swipe gesture on the interface), the computer system causes the display of the user interface to play the first media (eg, including a play button to play the second media without playing the first media) ) is replaced with a display of a user interface for playing the second media. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the user input and the user input (eg, 950i ) is a selection of a playback user interface object (eg, on a play button displayed as part of a user interface for playing the first media) tab), the computer system plays the second media (eg, the most recently received media corresponding to the notification) and subsequently plays the first media.

In some embodiments, display a user interface (eg, 720 of FIGS. 15B-15E ) for playing the first media (eg, as part of initiating a process for playing the first media and the second media) While playing and playing the first media, the computer system receives an input. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the user input and upon determining that the user input is for a first location on the user interface for playing the first media (eg, location 736 on user interface 720 ) , the computer system displays a user interface (eg, 741 ) for transmitting and recording new media (eg, one or more audio multicast messages) (and optionally automatically starts recording audio for transmission) In some embodiments, in response to receiving the user input and upon determining that the user input is for a second location on the user interface for playing the first media (eg, a location at 1534 ), the computer system: Replace the display of the user interface for playing the first media (eg, corresponding to 1524a) with the display of the user interface for playing the second media (eg, corresponding to 1524b), and to play the first media The second location on the user interface is different from the first location on the user interface for playing the first media. Upon determining that the user input is for a first location and a tap input, the computer system waits until a subsequent input (eg, a subsequent input detected at the same (or near the first location) location as the first location) is detected ( Record audio automatically (via one or more microphones). Upon determining that the user input is for the first location and a press-and-hold gesture, the computer system automatically records audio (via one or more microphones) until an end of the user input is detected. In some embodiments, while displaying the second notification, the computer system receives an input (eg, 950h) for the second notification. In some embodiments, in response to receiving input for the second notification, the computer system stops displaying the second notification. In some embodiments, once the second notification is activated, the second notification is displayed in response to user input requesting to display a set of notifications (eg, a list of recent notifications received at the computer system). for user accessible) from the set of notifications. In some embodiments, the set of notifications continues to include other notifications (eg, email notifications, instant messaging notifications). Choosing to remove a notification when the notification has been interacted with avoids the device providing the user with stale notifications (eg, outdated, irrelevant) that would clutter the UI, without requiring the user to manually delete the notifications. allow to do Performing an optimized action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, helps the user to provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with a computer system and reduces user errors) ) improves the operability of the computer system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and shortens the battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently. improve

In some embodiments, the computer system is a group of a plurality of external devices (eg, a home) that receives data corresponding to media directed to a location (eg, a higher level location (home), a lower location (room of the house)). display a user interface for configuring whether to include a computer system in a device that receives audio messages directed to external devices of A group of a plurality of external devices (eg, an external device at home) that receives data corresponding to media directed to that location, regardless of the current physical location of the computer system (eg, as determined by a location sensor of the computer system). a first option (eg, 799c) to (eg, always) include (eg, always) the computer system in the device that receives audio messages directed to them; and irrespective of the current physical location of the computer system (eg, as determined by a location sensor of the computer system), a group of a plurality of external devices (eg, at home) that receive data corresponding to media directed to that location. and a second option (eg, 799a) to not (eg, never) include (eg, never) the computer system in the device that receives audio messages directed to external devices. In some embodiments, a user may configure the computer system to register/deregister to receive data corresponding to the media or to enable/disable display of notifications based on received data corresponding to the media. have.

In some embodiments, the computer system is a group of a plurality of external devices (eg, a home) that receives data corresponding to media directed to a location (eg, a higher level location (home), a lower location (room of the house)). display a user interface for configuring whether to include a computer system in a device that receives audio messages directed to external devices of The system (eg, 700) is currently located at a physical location corresponding to the location (eg, within the geo-fenced perimeter of the home, as determined by a position sensor of the computer system, within a particular room of the house). ) including a computer system (eg, 700 ) in a group of a plurality of external devices that, when present, receives data corresponding to media directed to that location (eg, a device that receives audio messages directed to devices external to the home); the computer system (eg, 700) is currently at a physical location corresponding to the location (eg, within the geo-fence perimeter of the house, within a particular room of the house, as determined by a position sensor of the computer system) including a computer system (eg, 700 ) in a group of a plurality of external devices (eg, a device that receives audio messages directed to devices external to the home) that, when not present, receives data corresponding to media directed to the location and a third option (eg, 77b) not to do so. In some embodiments, the user allows the computer system to receive only data corresponding to media (e.g., when the computer system is in a home input to configure the computer system (to obtain only messages directed to home when present, to obtain only messages directed to the room when the computer system is in a room).

Note that the details of the processes described above with respect to method 1000 (eg, FIG. 10 ) are also applicable in a manner similar to the methods described/above described below. For example, method 1000 optionally includes one or more of the features of various methods described above/below with reference to methods 800 and 1200 . For example, the computer systems may be identical systems. As another example, the audio message transmitted in method 800 may be media received in method 1000 . As another example, the voice input transmitted in method 1200 may be the same as media received in method 1000 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

11A-11R illustrate example user interfaces and electronic devices for managing visual displays. The user interfaces of these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 12 .

11A-11R show that the device 1100 displays a first type of visual (eg, monochromatic lights) when the device 1100 determines that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. display a visual indication with the content, and when device 1100 is unable to determine that a portion of the speech input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices (eg, no portion of the speech input is an audio multicast message). determines not to be transmitted to one or more external devices) illustrates scenarios in which device 1100 displays a visual indication with visual content of a second type (eg, multicolor lights). The first and second types of visual content are described below for illustrative purposes only. The first and second types of visual content are different to provide the user with a visual indication of whether the spoken voice input will potentially be multicast to one or more external devices.

11A illustrates an electronic device 1100 in a position on a table positioned in front of a person. Device 1100 is a smart speaker and includes one or more features of device 580 . For example, device 1100 includes one or more displays 1102 that include one or more components of one or more displays 580E. Displays 1102 include a plurality of LEDs. In some embodiments, device 1100 includes one or more features of devices 100 , 300 , or 500 . In FIG. 11A , device 1100 is associated with home 602 and living room 602d for illustrative purposes only. Thus, in FIG. 11A , device 1100 is one of living room speakers 646 , 648 as described above with respect to FIG. 6 . In some embodiments, device 1100 is associated with another room (or other home) within home 602 .

11A , the device 1100 is in an inactive state (eg, a sleep state, a low power state, a state in which the device 1100 does not display visual content via the display 1102), Accordingly, display 1102 does not display visual content (eg, a visual indication). In some embodiments, when device 1100 is not displaying visual content, the LEDs of displays 1102 are not illuminated.

11A-11L illustrate a device 1100 displaying visual content in response to receiving a voice input that includes information to be multicast to one or more target groups of devices. In some embodiments, one or more similar techniques described above with respect to device 700 for receiving voice input of FIGS. 7M and 7N and FIGS. 7S-7Z are used, as described below, for receiving voice input. It can be applied to device 1100 (or vice versa).

11B to 11F illustrate a device 1100 that receives a voice input from a person standing in front of the device 1100 . 11B to 11F , the voice input received by the device 1100 is “HEY ASSISTANT, MULTICAST, WHAT MUSIC DO YOU WANT TO PLAY IN THE LIVING ROOM?”. The voice input received in FIGS. 11B to 11F may be received in a natural speaking manner or in another manner. 11B-11F are illustrated to provide an example embodiment of how a device 1100 may respond to different portions of a voice input.

In FIG. 11B , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150b from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "HEY ASSISTANT."

As illustrated in FIG. 11B , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150b , the device 1100 may display an active state (eg, an awake state, a powered state, and displays 1102 ) in a state of displaying content), causing device 1100 to display visual content via displays 1102 . In FIG. 11B , device 1100 is multicolored, represented by different types of disks on displays 1102 (eg, black disks, white disks, and patterned disks of 1102 in FIG. 11B ). Display visual content (eg, visual indication) (eg, lights). In FIG. 11B , device 1100 displays multi-colored visual content because device 1100 has not determined that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices.

In FIG. 11C , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150c from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "MULTICAST."

11C , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150c , the device 1100 remains active. In FIG. 11C , device 1100 displays visual content that is a solid color (eg, the black disks of 1102 in FIG. 11B without any other types of disks), because device 1100 displays a portion of the voice input. This is because it has decided that it should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. Here, the device 1100 determines that a portion of the voice input should be transmitted (eg, multicast) as an audio multicast message, because the device 1100 determines that the person is sending a multicast command (eg, an audio message). This is because it detected the phrase of a command (eg, "MULTICAST") indicating that it is issuing a command to multicast).

In FIG. 11D , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150d from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "WHAT MUSIC."

11D , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150d, the device 1100 remains active. In FIG. 11D , device 1100 displays solid visual content based on a determination that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices (eg, as described above with respect to FIG. 11C ). continue to display. In some embodiments, device 1100 indicates that a portion of the voice input should be sent to one or more devices assigned to home 602 (eg, for reasons similar to those described above with respect to FIGS. 7M and 7N ). decide In some embodiments, device 1100 determines that a portion of the voice input is selected based on the voice input corresponding to the group identifier (eg, “Home”, “Living Room”, “Entertainment Zone”, “to Dining Room”). determine one or more devices to transmit the portion of the voice input to based on whether they are assigned to a group of

In particular, when compared to FIG. 11C , the pattern of visual content displayed by device 1100 of FIG. 11D is different from the pattern of visual content displayed by device 1100 of FIG. 11C . 11C and 11D , device 1100 displays, via displays 1102 , different visual content in response to the person's voice. In other words, because “MULTICAST” and “WHAT MUSIC” are different phrases, the device 1100 changes the pattern of the visual content. In some embodiments, device 1100 changes a pattern of visual content based on speed, clarity, volume, pitch, tone, and/or rhythm (eg, a beat) of a portion of the voice content. Thus, different portions of the audio content create different patterns of the visual content. In some embodiments, device 1100 may determine the color saturation, brightness, size of the visual content based on the speed, clarity, volume, pitch, tone, and/or rhythm (eg, beat) of the portion of the audio content. , or change the location. In some embodiments, device 1100 does not change the pattern of visual content and/or does not respond to the person's voice.

In FIG. 11E , device 1100 continues to receive voice input portion 1150e from a person standing in front of device 1100 via one or more microphones of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "DO YOU WANT TO PLAY."

11E , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150e , the device 1100 remains active. In FIG. 11E , device 1100 continues to display solid visual content based on a determination that a portion of the voice input should be sent to one or more external devices. In addition, the device 1100 changes the pattern of the visual content because the voice input portion 1150e is different from the voice input portion 1150d.

11F , device 1100 continues to receive voice input portion 1150f from a person standing in front of device 1100 via one or more microphones of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "IN THE LIVING ROOM?"

11F , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150f , the device 1100 remains active. In FIG. 11F , device 1100 continues to display solid visual content based on a determination that a portion of the voice input should be sent to one or more external devices. In addition, the device 1100 changes the pattern of the visual content because the voice input portion 1150f is different from the voice input portion 1150e.

In FIG. 11F , the device 1100 detects the end of the voice input received in FIGS. 11B to 11F . 11F , in response to detecting the end of the voice input, device 1100 transmits one or more portions of the voice input as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. In some embodiments, the audio multicast message includes 1150c and 1150d (eg, "WHAT MUSIC DO YOU WANT TO PLAY IN THE LIVING ROOM?"). In some embodiments, the audio multicast message does not include voice input portions 1150b (“HEY, ASSISTANT”) and/or 1150c (“MULTICAST”) because voice input portions 1150b and/or 1150c (“MULTICAST”) or 1150c) corresponds to the command portion of the voice input. In some embodiments, when the input includes a portion corresponding to a target group identifier (eg, “Home” or “Living Room”), the target group identifier (not part of the voice input corresponding to the target group identifier) is Sent with the audio multicast message (eg, as plain text), but not output as audio by one or more external devices. In some embodiments, the audio multicast message output by one or more external devices sounds like the person (which is a played recording of the person who uttered the voice input), and computer-generated speech through the device. is not

As illustrated in FIG. 11G , device 1100 indicates that a portion of the voice input is “123 Main St. ") provides an output 1154g indicating that it was sent to (eg, outputs). When outputting output 1154g, device 1100 displays a solid color because of a determination that a portion of the voice input (eg, received in FIGS. 11B-11F ) should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. Display visual content. In some embodiments, device 1100, regardless of this determination, displays multicolored visual content when outputting audio confirmation 1154g.

As illustrated in FIG. 11H , the device 1100 is changed to an inactive state. In FIG. 11I , device 1100 receives data corresponding to an audio multicast message from Jane via one or more of the external devices assigned to home 602 .

As illustrated in FIG. 11I , in response to receiving the audio multicast message (and without (regardless) receiving user input), device 1100 generates an introductory tone or chime. A phosphor output 1154i is provided. 11J , after providing output 1154i , device 1100 provides output 1154j corresponding to the audio multicast message received in FIG. 11I .

11I and 11J , device 1100 displays visual content that is monochrome when providing output 1150i and output 1150j. Device 1100 displays visual content that is monochrome because device 1100 is outputting an audio multicast message. 11I and 11J , the device 1100 also displays the same pattern of visual content. Accordingly, in FIGS. 11I and 11J , device 1100 does not change the visual content based on the different content of outputs 1150i and 1150j . In some embodiments, device 1100 changes the visual content based on the different content of output 1150i and output 1150j . In some embodiments, device 1100 provides output 11541150i and/or output 1150j at a current volume level (eg, system volume level) of device 1100 . In some embodiments, one of output 1154i and/or output 1150j is provided at the volume level of device 1100 while the other is not. In some embodiments, device 1100 receives multiple audio multicast messages within a period of time and outputs the same (or different) introductory tone before each of the audio multicast messages is played. In some embodiments, device 1100 receives multiple audio multicast messages within a period of time, and receives the same (or the same) before each group of audio multicast messages (eg, grouped by a target group of devices) that is played. different) introductory tones.

11J , the audio message provided by device 1100 says "JANE REPLIED FROM HOME: HOW ABOUT JAZZ?" Here, the audio message provided by the device 1100 includes a target identifier; In some embodiments, he is not.

11K , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150k from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "HEY ASSISTANT, REPLY, YOU GOT IT."

As illustrated in FIG. 11K , device 1100 displays visual content that is monochromatic (eg, the black disks of 1102 in FIG. 11K ), because device 1100 displays a portion of voice input portion 1150k. This is because it has decided that it should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. In some embodiments, device 1100 displays voice input portion 1150k a predetermined time after device 1100 provides output 1150j (eg, the audio multicast message received in FIG. 11J ) (eg, 1 second, 2 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds). In some embodiments, device 1100 determines that voice input portion 1150k includes the phrase “Reply” and/or within a second predetermined amount of time after device 1100 provides output 1150j the phrase “ Reply", so we make this decision. In some embodiments, the second predetermined period of time is longer than the first predetermined period of time.

11L , device 1100 is changed to an inactive state.

11M-11R illustrate a device 1100 displaying visual content in response to receiving a voice input that does not include information to be multicast to one or more target groups of devices.

11M to 11O illustrate a device 1100 that receives a voice input from a person standing in front of the device 1100 . 11M to 11O , the voice input received by the device 1100 is “HEY ASSISTANT, PLAY JAZZ MUSIC IN THE LIVING ROOM”. The voice input received in FIGS. 11M-11O may be received in a natural speaking manner or otherwise. 11M-11O are illustrated to provide an example embodiment of how a device 1100 may respond to different portions of a voice input.

In FIG. 11M , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150m from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "HEY ASSISTANT." As illustrated in FIG. 11M , in response to receiving voice input portion 1150m , device 1100 changes to an active state, using one or more techniques similar to those described above in FIG. 11B . In addition, device 1100 displays multi-colored visual content (eg, lighting) because device 1100 determines that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. because it didn't

In FIG. 11N , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150n from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "PLAY JAZZ MUSIC." 11N , in response to receiving voice input portion 1150n , device 1100 displays multi-colored visual content (eg, lights) because device 1100 displays voice input This is because it has not determined that a portion of .

11O , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150o from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "IN THE LIVING ROOM." 11O , in response to receiving voice input portion 1150o , device 1100 displays multi-colored visual content (eg, lights) because device 1100 displays voice input This is because it has not determined that a portion of .

11M-11O , the device 1100 has no visual content responding to voice input. In some embodiments, device 1100 does not change the pattern of visual content when device 1100 has not determined that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices. In some embodiments, device 1100, regardless of this determination, changes the pattern of visual content to respond to different portions of speech input.

11P , device 1100 provides (eg, outputs) output 1154p indicating that device 1100 is currently playing a jazz radio. When providing the output 1154g, the device 1100 determines that the portion of the voice input (eg, received in FIGS. 11M-11O ) should not be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices: Display multi-colored visual content (eg, visual indications). 11P , device 1100 also outputs jazz music.

11Q , while outputting jazz music, the device 1100 is changed to an inactive state.

11R , device 1100 receives, via one or more microphones of device 1100 , a voice input portion 1150r from a person standing in front of device 1100 . Here, the person uttered the phrase "PAUSE". 11R , in response to receiving the voice input portion 1150r , device 1100 displays multi-colored visual content (eg, lights) because device 1100 displays voice input This is because it has not determined that a portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices (eg, it has determined that no portion of the voice input should be sent as an audio multicast message to one or more external devices). 11R , device 1100 also, in response to receiving a “PAUSE” command, stops outputting jazz music and pauses media corresponding to the jazz music.

12 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for displaying visual indications using an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1200 is performed at a device (eg, 100 , 300 , 500 , 634 , 674 , 700 , 701 , 850 ) having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices. Some operations of the method 1200 are selectively combined, the orders of some operations are selectively changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

As described below, method 1200 provides an intuitive method for displaying visual indications. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user of determining the type of command given to the device, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling the user to recognize the type of command faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

The electronic device receives ( 1202 ) voice input (eg, 1150a - 1150r) via one or more microphones.

The electronic device displays 1204 a visual indication of the voice input (eg, lights displayed via 1102), wherein a portion of the voice input (eg, 1150b-1150f, 1150r) is to be transmitted to one or more devices. Corresponding to (eg, and, in some embodiments, to be transmitted, (eg, multicast)) voice input (eg, and/or to be transmitted (eg, to be multicast) to a plurality of devices) another portion of the voice input (eg, non-transmitted voice input). A portion of the first type of command (eg, at least a portion of the voice input (e.g. intelligent) light bulbs, thermostats, door locks, door openers (e.g. garage door openers), speakers, televisions, electrical outlets, power strips, cameras, appliances (e.g. refrigerators, stoves))) In response to a determination (corresponding to a command that initiates a process for sending to displaying a visual indication in a first set of colors; voice input (eg, 1150m-1150o, 1150r) is (eg, eg, by speakers of other devices (eg, a plurality of other devices); , to send any portion of the voice input to other devices (eg, to multicast) (eg, the other portion of the voice input is a second type of command) to output a portion of the voice input In accordance with the determination not to, display ( 1210 ) the visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIGS. 11M-11O , 11R ) via one or more display devices, wherein the first set of one or more colors is different than the first set of one or more colors. Displaying visual indications in 2 sets include In some embodiments, the first type of command is a command that initiates a process for transmitting at least a portion of the voice input (eg, the portion of the voice input to be transmitted) to a plurality of external devices. In some embodiments, transmitting at least a portion of the voice input to the plurality of devices causes two or more of the plurality of external devices to output a portion of the voice input (eg, automatically (eg, via user input). (without prompting) to print). In some embodiments, the plurality of external devices include different types of external electronic devices (eg, personal device, external accessory device). In some embodiments, the plurality of devices are located at a higher level location (or destination) (eg, a first type of location) (eg, a home location, a business, an office (eg, a location that is a higher level location (eg, of a higher level location)). A location that defines one or more locations (eg, sub-locations) and/or one or more areas (or zones) within a region and/or perimeter defined by a location, a location at a higher level in a hierarchy of locations , one or more locations (eg, sub-locations) and/or a location that is (eg, programmatically) linked to one or more regions (or regions)))). In some embodiments, the first group of devices may include a plurality of subgroups of devices. In some embodiments, a subgroup of devices is located at a lower level (e.g., at a higher level location (e.g., within a boundary, region, or perimeter of the higher level location; and/or at a definition, identification, and/or higher level location) For example, by a user) a linked (eg, programmatically linked) located room and/or area (eg, from a higher level location to within a higher level location (eg, within a boundary, area, or perimeter of a higher level location)). and/or defined, identified, and/or defined by two or more sub-locations (eg, linked (eg, by the user)); a private area))) comprising two or more bedrooms, living rooms, bathrooms in In some embodiments, the first user interface is a control user interface. In some embodiments, the plurality of devices is associated with a plurality of subgroups of devices. In some embodiments, the visual indication is continuously displayed while receiving voice input via one or more microphones. In some embodiments, the visual indication stops being displayed after being initially displayed while receiving voice input via one or more microphones. In some embodiments, the second type of command is not a command that initiates a process for transmitting at least a portion of the voice input to a plurality of external devices (eg, speakers, personal device (eg, cellular phone)). In some embodiments, the visual indication is continuously displayed while receiving voice input via one or more microphones. In some embodiments, the visual indication stops being displayed after being initially displayed while receiving voice input via one or more microphones. Displaying the visual indication in the first set of colors when it is determined that the portion of the speech input should be sent to one or more devices provides feedback to the user as to whether the portion of the speech input will be played on external electronic devices, comprising: Allows users to know that their utterances are potentially audible to others. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Displaying the visual indication in the second set of one or more colors (eg, different from the first set of one or more colors) does not include instructions for the user's voice input to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices. When determined not to, provide the user with confidence that the user's utterances will not be heard by individuals on other external devices. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the electronic device retrieves information (eg, retrieves information such as weather, responses to one or more queries) or changes one or more states of the electronic device (eg, an audio state (eg, phone answer/make phone calls, adjust volume), media playback status (e.g. pause, play, fast forward, rewind, skip, media shuffling), change on/off status ) requesting voice input (eg, 1150m to 1150o) is a voice input that does not include a command to transmit any part of the voice input to other devices.

In some embodiments, the voice input corresponding to the voice input to be transmitted to one or more devices (eg, 1150b-1150f, 1150k) is an identifier for the group of devices (eg, location, sub-location, group (“home”)). or a category (eg, a location corresponding to a "dining room", "living room", "solarium" within a group) (1208). In some embodiments, the voice input includes an identifier for the group of devices, and an audio message to be sent to the group of devices. In some embodiments, the voice input (eg, 1150m-1150o, 1150r) that does not include an instruction to send any portion of the voice input to other devices does not include an identifier for the group of devices ( 1212 ). In some embodiments, the voice input does not include an identifier for the group of devices, and the audio message is not sent to the group of devices.

In some embodiments, a first set of one or more colors (eg, 1102 in FIGS. 11C-11F ) is a solid color, and a second set of one or more colors (eg, 1102 in FIGS. 11M-11O ) in some embodiments. is a plurality of colors. In some embodiments, the solid color is not included in the plurality of colors. Applying different visual effects to an electronic device when different prescribed conditions are met allows the user to quickly recognize whether their utterance will be transmitted and played back by external electronic devices. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of displaying the visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIGS. 11C-11F ) in a first set of one or more colors, the electronic device is configured to: Based on variations in values for an input parameter (such as volume, tone, and/or pitch) over a period of time (eg, 1 second, 5 seconds, 10 seconds) (eg, based on the time the voice input is received) ) (eg, of a pattern (eg, spatial pattern) of lights) changing (eg, in size, brightness, saturation, and/or position) (eg, 1102 of FIGS. 11C-11F ).

In some embodiments, as part of displaying an animation (eg, 1102 of FIGS. 11C-11F ), the electronic device displays a visual indication (eg, FIGS. 11C-11F ) based on one or more of a volume or a pitch of the voice input. 1102) change (eg, increase or decrease) one or more of the brightness, size, saturation, or position. In some embodiments, as the volume and/or pitch of the voice input increases/decreases, one or more of brightness, magnitude, saturation of the visual indication. In some embodiments, as the rhythm (eg, or beat) of the voice input increases/decreases, the rhythm (or beat) of the animation increases/decreases. In some embodiments, as the volume and/or pitch of the voice input increases/decreases, the visual indication occupies more/less portion of the area of the display device. Updating the visual properties (eg, brightness, size, saturation, or position) of the visual indication to reflect changes in the user's voice input (eg, changes in volume or pitch of the voice input) may be useful for varying the user's voice input. Provides visual feedback to the user regarding characteristics. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the electronic device receives data corresponding to a plurality of audio messages for playback. In some embodiments, the data corresponding to the plurality of audio messages for playback is an identifier for a group of devices (eg, a group (“home”) or a category (eg, “dining room”, “living room”, “ location corresponding to the solarium")). In some embodiments, the plurality of audio messages are for a plurality of identifiers, where each identifier corresponds to a different group or category. In some embodiments, in response to receiving data corresponding to the plurality of audio messages for playback, the electronic device, before outputting each respective one of the plurality of audio messages (eg, and of the devices) before outputting the identifier for the group), an introductory tone (eg, 1154i) (eg, a dinging or ringing sound, an introductory tone or chime for all audio messages). In some embodiments, the identifier is output before the group of audio messages corresponding to the identifier (eg, identifying a target group of devices) is output. Outputting the same introductory tone before outputting the different multicasted audio messages informs the recipients that the audio message is an audio message of the multicast type. Providing improved audio feedback improves the operability of the device and further enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device). efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the electronic device receives data corresponding to an audio message for playback (eg, an audio multicast message). In some embodiments, the data corresponding to the audio message for playback is an identifier (eg, group (“home”)) or category (eg, “dining room”, “living room”, “solarium” within the group) associated with the group of devices. ) and the corresponding position). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the data, the electronic device automatically, without user input, outputs an audio message (eg, via a speaker of the electronic device) (eg, 1154j). In some embodiments, outputting the audio message corresponds to an identifier for a group of devices (eg, a group (“home”) or a category (eg, “dining room”, “living room”, “solarium” within the group)). location) is printed.

In some embodiments, prior to outputting the audio message, a second visual indication (eg, 1102 in FIG. 11I ) is displayed in response to receiving the data. In some embodiments, the second visual indication has a first visual appearance (eg, color, size, brightness) when the audio message is an audio message sent to multiple devices (eg, a group of devices). In some embodiments, the second visual indication has a second visual appearance that is different from the first visual appearance when the audio message is an audio message sent to an electronic device and not to other devices.

In some embodiments, the electronic device receives data corresponding to an audio message for playback (eg, an audio multicast message). In some embodiments, the data corresponding to the audio message for playback is an identifier (eg, group (“home”)) or category (eg, “dining room”, “living room”, “solarium” within the group) associated with the group of devices. ) and the corresponding position). In some embodiments, output an audio message (eg, automatically, in response to a user request). In some embodiments, while outputting the audio message, the electronic device causes a visual indication (eg, an unaltered visual indication (eg, a beat)) based on one or more characteristics of the audio message (eg, volume, pitch, tone, rhythm (eg, beat)). 1102 in FIG. 11J) are displayed simultaneously.

In some embodiments, the audio message is output (eg, 1154j) based on a volume level (eg, system level audio level) (eg, current volume level) of the electronic device. In some embodiments, the electronic device does not display the visual content (eg, 1102 of FIG. 11A ) before the visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIGS. 11B-11F ) is displayed (eg, does not display any lights). not (eg, the LEDs are not lit). In some embodiments, the electronic device is in an inactive display state (eg, the LEDs are not illuminated) before the visual indication is displayed. In some embodiments, while displaying the visual indication, the electronic device is in an active display state (eg, some LEDs are illuminated). Not displaying the visual content when no voice input is received provides the user with visual feedback that no voice input is received and that any utterances by the user are transmitted and not reproduced by other external devices. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the electronic device prevents displaying a visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIG. 11G ), including ceasing to display the visual content (eg, 1102 of FIG. 11H ) via one or more display devices. abort (1214). In some embodiments, the electronic device is in an inactive display state after ceasing to display the visual content. Not displaying visual content when voice input is not being received provides the user with visual feedback that voice input is not being received and extends the battery life of the device because the device is in an inactive state. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIG. 11G ) is another visual indication (eg, a state or process to which the visual indication corresponds (eg, a multicast process or process for sending/receiving audio multicast messages). and a visual indication corresponding to a different state or process (eg, other visual content) are not displayed at the same time. Providing only one visual indication at a time provides the user with clarity regarding the state of the electronic device and whether the user's utterances are being transmitted and being played back by other external devices. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the visual indication (eg, 1102 of FIG. 11G ) executes on (eg, the electronic device, or one or more external applications that transmit data to or receive data from the electronic device) in communication with the electronic device. different lighting based on the state of one or more applications (eg, a multicast process or a process for sending/receiving audio multicast messages, a process associated with a state of an electronic device, a state for a process associated with a state of the electronic device) Illumination (eg, LEDs of 1102) that provides an indication.

Note that the details of the processes described above with respect to method 1200 (eg, FIG. 12 ) are also applicable in a manner similar to the methods described above. For example, method 1200 optionally includes one or more of the features of various methods described above with reference to methods 800 and 1000 . For example, the computer systems may be identical systems. As another example, the audio message transmitted in method 800 may be media received in method 1000 . As another example, the voice input transmitted in method 1200 may be the same as media received in method 1000 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

13A-13N illustrate example electronic devices and user interfaces for managing external devices, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 14 .

13A illustrates an electronic device 700 displaying a user interface 710 . In some embodiments, device 700 may be associated with home 602 as described above (eg, in FIGS. 7A-7A ) (eg, may or may not communicate with one or more networks associated with the home) , located at a physical location relative to the home, interacting with one or more devices assigned to the home, etc.). The user interface 710 is a user interface for controlling a plurality of external devices allocated to the house 602 . User interface 710 includes a home location identifier 712 , macro controls 716 , and external device controls 718 that may have one or more characteristics and may be responded in a manner as described above with respect to FIGS. 7A-7A . ), navigation controls 722 , a home multicast command 724 , and a home multicast affordance 726 (eg, a selectable user interface object).

User interface 710 also includes status indicators 1314 . Each of the status indicators includes information regarding the current status of some of the devices currently assigned to home 602 (eg, some of which were described above with respect to FIG. 6 ). As illustrated in FIG. 13A , status indicators 1314 (from left to right, respectively) include carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a , alarm status indicator 1314b , account error status indicator 1314c , update available status indicator 1314d, and a portion of timer status indicator 1314e. The carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a indicates a carbon monoxide detection status, such as a warning, in which the one or more carbon monoxide detectors or sensors have detected the presence of carbon monoxide in the house 602 and the one or more carbon monoxide detectors or sensors have detected a carbon monoxide leak accordingly. Indicates that it is in the "on" state. Alarm status indicator 1314b indicates that one or more alarms associated with home 602 have been triggered and thus one or more alarms are in an active state, such as a triggered or alerting state. The account error status indicator 1314c is a problem in which the device 700 is not currently logged into an account associated with the home 602 or the device 700 is accessing one or more known external devices assigned to the home 602 . indicates that device 700 has current issues with an account associated with home 602 , such as having The update available status indicator 1314d indicates that updated software (eg, software that includes one or more functions corresponding to a home application) is available to be installed on one or more external devices and/or device 700 . indicates that Timer status indicator 1314e indicates that one or more timers are currently active. Moreover, the timer status indicator 1314e indicates that at least one timer (or the sum of the total time of the plurality of timers) is in a state in which about 0% of the time has elapsed from the time the timer (or the plurality of timers) was originally set. indicates that there is In particular, this state is represented by the remaining time indication 1314e1 covering approximately 100% of the perimeter of the timer status indicator 1314e.

Each status indicator includes a name (eg, "CARBON MONOXIDE") associated with the status indicator (eg, carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a), and includes at least one particular visual characteristic (eg, a color (eg, red, gray, etc.), patterns, shapes, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more of the status indicators is a plurality of certain types of devices (eg, carbon monoxide detector or sensor) that are in a state (eg, active, alert, or need attention) represented by the status indicators. ) includes the expression of Each status indicator may also include a quick visual representation of the status indicator's status.

In FIG. 13A , each status indicator is within (eg, included in, part of, or belongs to) a particular status indicator category, and the status indicators indicate their respective status indicators to which each of the respective status indicators corresponds. They are displayed in order based on child categories. In FIG. 13A , a particular status indicator category of a status indicator indicates the urgency (or importance) of the status indicator. Status indicators within one status indicator category may have one or more characteristics that differ from one or more characteristics of status indicators within a different status indicator category. As illustrated in FIG. 13A , the carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a and alarm status indicator 1314b are within a first status indicator category (eg, most urgent category, alarm category) and have a first color (eg, vertical displayed in red), as indicated by hatching. In some embodiments, the first status indicator category indicates that external devices associated with a particular status indicator should be addressed as soon as possible. Next, in FIG. 13A , the account error status indicator 1314c and the update available status indicator 1314d are less than the second status indicator category (eg, the second most urgent category, the first status indicator category). urgent status indicator category, action request category) and displayed in a different color (eg, as indicated without hatching) than the color of the status indicators in the first category. In FIG. 13A , timer status indicator 1314e is in a third status indicator category (eg, a third most urgent category, a less urgent status indicator category than the second status indicator category). Timer status indicator 1314e includes one or more dynamic components related to the state of a timer corresponding to timer status indicator 1314e (eg, time remaining indication 1314e1 ). In some embodiments, one or more dynamic components (eg, time remaining indication 1314e1 ) are updated in real time (eg, as described further below with reference to FIG. 13B ). In some embodiments, status indicators within the first and/or second status indicator categories do not have one or more dynamic components that relate to a particular status of one or more external devices corresponding to the respective status indicator. .

In some embodiments, when a determination is made that a new status indicator will need to be displayed, the device 700 displays a new status indicator after (or before or in between) status indicators in the same status indicator category as the new status indicator. It will display a status indicator. For example, when a determination is made that a new status indicator is to be displayed and the new status indicator is within the second status indicator category, device 700 (eg, the beginning of all displayed status indicators 1314 and/or (or instead of appending a new status indicator at the end) displays a new status indicator between the update available status indicator 1314d and the timer status indicator 1314e. Accordingly, the new status indicator is displayed on the device 700 at a location related to the urgency of the status indicator so that the user can determine the new status based on the relative urgency of the new status indicator compared to the related urgency of other displayed status indicators. Identify and/or interact with the indicator. In FIG. 13A , device 700 detects gesture 1350a at a location corresponding to status indicators 1314 .

In FIG. 13B , device 700 determines that gesture 1350a is a left swipe gesture. As illustrated in FIG. 13B , since device 700 has determined that gesture 1350a is a swipe gesture, device 700 is displayed on device 700 at once (eg, with status indicators ( 1314) display additional status indicators if there are more status indicators than can be displayed. In particular, the device 700 moves the status indicators 1314 previously displayed on FIG. 13A to the left (eg, in the direction of the gesture 1350a ), such that the carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a, the alarm status indicator 1314b , and account error status indicator 1314c stop being displayed, and update available status indicator 1314d and timer status indicator 1314e display carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a and alarm status indicator 1314b has been replaced, respectively, and portions of the climate state indicator 1314f, the door lock state indicator 1314g, and the lighting state indicator 1314h are newly displayed in FIG. 13B .

As illustrated in FIG. 13B , timer status indicator 1314e includes a dynamic component, time remaining indication 1314e1 . 13A and 13B , the remaining time indication 1314e1 is the timer status indicator in FIG. 13B since the timer started at 13 minutes in FIG. 13A (eg, not in response to user input but rather in response to the passage of time). It moves from surrounding approximately 100% of the perimeter of 1314e to surrounding approximately 750% of the perimeter of timer status indicator 1314e in FIG. 13B and continues until approximately 10 minutes remain in FIG. 13B .

In FIG. 13B , the climate status indicator 1314f is in a third status indicator category, which is the same status category as the timer status indicator 1314e as discussed above with respect to FIG. 13A . The climate condition indicator 1314f represents a status indicator that corresponds to conditions of a number of different types of external devices (eg, air quality sensors, temperature, humidity sensors). The climate condition indicator 1314f indicates that the average temperature detected by the one or more climate control devices (or at which the one or more climate control devices are set) is 68 degrees, and the average humidity detected by the one or more humidity sensors is 40% , indicating that the average air quality detected by the one or more air quality sensors is good. Moreover, status indicator 1314f also indicates that the thermostat control is causing the heating system to be activated (eg, that the room is being heated by the device that the thermostat control is controlling), which indicates status indicator 1314f ) is indicated by an upward arrow. In some embodiments, when the status indicator 1314f includes a down arrow, the status indicator 1314f indicates that the thermostat control is causing the air conditioning system to be activated (eg, the room is controlled by the thermostat control). indicates that the device is being cooled). In some embodiments, when status indicator 1314f includes a dash, status indicator 1314f indicates that the thermostat control is not causing the air conditioning system or heating system to be activated (eg, Indicates that the room is being detected as being at the specific temperature the thermostat is set to). In FIG. 13B , device 700 detects gesture 1350b at a location corresponding to status indicators 1314 .

13C , device 700 determines that gesture 1350b is a left swipe gesture. As illustrated in FIG. 13C , since device 700 has determined that gesture 1350b is a swipe gesture, device 700 displays additional status indicators. In particular, device 700 moves status indicator 1314 that was previously displayed on FIG. 13B to the left, so that update available status indicator 1314d, timer status indicator 1314e, and climate status indicator ( 1314f) stop being displayed, door lock status indicator 1314g, light status indicator 1314h slide to the left, window open status indicator 1314i, door sensor status indicator 1314j , and motion sensor status indicator 1314k are newly displayed in FIG. 13C . In embodiments in which the gesture 1350b is determined to be a right swipe gesture, the device 700 displays previously displayed status indicators (eg, the carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a displayed in FIG. 13A , an alarm status indication). move the status indicators to the right to display one or more of the rulers 1314b).

In FIG. 13C , door lock status indicator 1314g , light status indicator 1314h , and window open status indicator 1314i have a fourth status indicator category (eg, fourth most urgent category, third status). less urgent status indicator category, quick action status indicator category) than the indicator category. As described, categories for certain status types are predefined, however, in some embodiments, the category for a specific type of status indicator may be specified via one or more user inputs. In some embodiments, device 700 may include a particular type of status indicator (eg, most important, second most important, third most urgent, etc.) and/or a status category of a status indicator associated with the particular type of device. displays one or more settings for a particular type of status indicator and/or a particular type of device (eg, lights) that allows the user to set

A status indicator in the fourth status indicator category indicates that a number of external devices of a given type are in a given state. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 13B , the door lock status indicator 1314g indicates that the two door locks are in the unlocked state. As another example, in FIG. 13C , light status indicator 1314h indicates that 5 lights are in an active (or on) state, and window open status indicator 1314i indicates 7 window blinds (eg, coverings). , awnings) are in the open state. In particular, the status indicator in the fourth status indicator category excludes information about devices of the same type in different states. For example, the living room desk lamp assigned to the house 602 is off (eg, as indicated by the living room desk lamp control 718g). In FIG. 13C , the lighting status indicator 1314h does not include information about the living room desk lamp because the living room desk lamp is off (as described in more detail below with respect to FIGS. 13D-13F ).

13C-13H illustrate different gestures detected by device 700 for a status indicator (eg, a status indicator within a fourth status indicator category). In particular, FIGS. 13C-13H illustrate that different gestures are for the lighting status indicator 1314h. However, similar techniques as described herein can be applied to gestures that are for other status indicators, such as door lock status indicator 1314g and window open status indicator 1314i. In FIG. 13C , the device 700 detects a gesture 1350c (eg, at a location corresponding thereto) for the lighting status indicator 1314h.

13D , device 700 determines that gesture 1350c is a press-and-hold gesture (eg, a gesture detected for more than a predetermined period of time). 13D , because device 700 determined that gesture 1350c was a press-and-hold gesture, device 700 (eg, when it was determined that gesture 1350b was a swipe gesture) display the user interface 1340 (as opposed to displaying a status indicator). As shown in FIG. 13D , user interface 1340 has replaced user interface 710 that was previously displayed in FIG. 13C .

As illustrated in FIG. 13D , user interface 1340 includes external device controls 718 for lights (eg, lighting devices) assigned to house 602 , because a lighting status indicator This is because 1314h represents the state of one or more lights assigned to house 602 . As illustrated in FIG. 13D , the external device controls 718 displayed on the user interface 1340 may include a room or portion of a house 602 (eg, a “bedroom”) to which each respective external device control is assigned. ordered by "dining room", "living room", "entrance"). For example, bedroom light control 718f and bedroom night light control 718h are assigned to a bedroom (eg, 602c) of house 602 and are under the name “BEDROOM” on user interface 1340 , and dining room lighting The control unit 718i is assigned to the dining room (eg, 602b) of the house 602 and is under the name “DINING ROOM” on the user interface 1340, and the living room lamp control unit 718b and the living room desk lamp control unit 718g are Assigned to the living room (e.g., 602d) of house 602 and under the name "LIVING ROOM" on user interface 1340, porch lighting control 718j is assigned to the porch of house 602 and user interface 1340 It's under the name "PORCH" on the top.

In particular, as illustrated in FIG. 13D , each of the bedroom lighting control unit 1718f, the bedroom night lighting control unit 718h, the dining room lighting control unit 718i, the living room lamp control unit 718b, and the entrance light control unit 718j corresponds to indicates that the respective devices (eg, light bulbs) are turned on or activated. In other words, bedroom light control 1718f, bedroom night light control 718h, dining room light control 718i, living room lamp control 718b, and porch light control 718j are turned on and the lighting status indicator in FIG. 13C ( 1314h) indicating one of the "FIVE LIGHTS ON" indications. Moreover, when viewing the lighting status indicator 1314h , six lights are shown on the user interface 1340 , but there is no indication of the sixth light and/or the status of the sixth light. Although only five lights are on or active and identified in the light status indicator 1314h, the house may have more lights, such as inactive or off lights associated with the house. In some implementations, user interface 1340 shows detailed states of all lights when displaying detailed states of lights. In FIG. 13D , the living room desk lamp is displayed with a different visual indication than the other lights (eg, indicating that the living room desk lamp control 718g is off). In some embodiments, the user interface 1340 does not include the living room desk lamp control 718g of FIG. 13D because the living room desk lamp is a different light represented by the lighting status indicator 1314h of FIG. 13C . This is because the control units are not in the same state. In some embodiments, if user interface 1340 does not include living room lamp control 718g of FIG. 13D , device 700 displays the same state of other lighting controls represented by lighting status indicator 1314h or display the living room lamp control 718g on the user interface 1340 in response to receiving an indication that the state of the living room desk lamp has changed to on (eg, when someone physically turns on the living room desk lamp) . In FIG. 13D , device 700 detects tap gesture 1350d for bedroom light control 718f.

In FIG. 13E , in response to detecting tap gesture 1350d , device 700 sends a command to cause bedroom light 632 to change state (eg, turn off) and the visual appearance of bedroom light control 718f update As illustrated in FIG. 13E , bedroom light control 718f is configured such that a bedroom light (eg, bedroom light 632 ) corresponding to bedroom light control 718f is turned on, eg, active, as shown in FIG. 13D , As opposed to being in a state, it indicates being turned off, eg, in an inactive state. In particular, the other lighting controls displayed on the user interface 1340 have not changed in FIGS. 13D and 13E . In response to detecting the tap gesture 1350d, device 700 sends a command to cause bedroom light 632 to change state without causing other lights represented by other lighting controls to change state. . Accordingly, the user interface 1340 allows the user to allow each device represented by each respective control unit to perform an action individually (eg, change the state of the device) without causing other devices to perform the action. allow to do) In FIG. 13E , device 700 detects tap gesture 1350e for completion affordance 1342 .

As illustrated in FIG. 13F , in response to detecting the tap gesture 1350e , device 700 stops displaying user interface 1340 and user interface 710 with status indicators 1314 . redisplays. As illustrated in FIG. 13F , the light status indicator 1314h indicates that the house 602 has 4 lights as opposed to 5 lights on as indicated by the light status indicator 1314h of FIG. 13C . It is updated to reflect what is turned on. Accordingly, some status indicators are updated to indicate the number of devices that are currently in a particular state (eg, whether the device has changed from that particular state or whether the device has changed to that particular state). Moreover, in FIG. 13F , the bedroom light control 718f has also changed on the user interface 710 to reflect that the bedroom light is off, but other lighting controls displayed on the user interface 710 (eg, a living room lamp). The control unit 718b and the living room desk lamp control unit 718g) have not changed compared to their respective appearances, as shown in Fig. 13C. Accordingly, device controls displayed on user interface 710 are also responsive to device 700 detecting gestures (eg, gesture 1350d) for device controls displayed via user interface 1340 . is updated with In FIG. 13F , device 700 detects gesture 1350f for lighting status indicator 1314h.

In FIG. 13G , device 700 determines that gesture 1350f is a tap gesture (eg, a gesture detected for less than a predetermined period of time, a gesture different from gestures 1350a - c ). In FIG. 13G , because device 700 has determined that gesture 1350f is a tap gesture, device 700 turns off (or states) the four lights indicated as turned on by light status indicator 1314h in FIG. 13F . to change) is sent. Accordingly, the bedroom night light control unit 718h, the dining room light control unit 718i, the living room lamp control unit 718b, and the entrance light control unit 718j are turned off in FIG. 13G . As illustrated in FIG. 13G , because device 700 has determined that gesture 1350f is a tap gesture, device 700 responds to the newly introduced hatching of FIG. 13G (eg, compared to the no hatching of FIG. 13F ). ) changes the visual appearance of the lighting status indicator 1314h and updates the lighting status indicator 1314h to indicate that four lights are off. In particular, as illustrated in FIG. 13G , the living room lamp control 718b and the living room desk lamp control 718g are also changed to indicate that their respective corresponding devices are turned off. Thus, in FIG. 13G , device 700 changes the state of multiple devices (eg, devices assigned to different rooms) in response to a single gesture (eg, tap) on the status indicator, which 700) is different from merely changing the state of one device in response to a gesture (eg, tap) of the same type on an external device control (eg, as described above with respect to gesture 1350d in FIG. 13D ). . Moreover, in FIG. 13G , device 700 performs the same action (eg, lights) based on the type of device (eg, lights, door locks, window blind adjusters) indicated by the status indicator to which the tap gesture is applied. turn on, lock the door, lower the blinds), causing multiple devices to change state. As illustrated in FIG. 13G , because gesture 1350f of FIG. 13H is a tap gesture for light status indicator 1314h , device 700 (compare FIGS. 13F and 13G ) displays the other status indicators. It does not change the state, does not send a command to cause other devices corresponding to the other state indicators to change state, and maintains the appearance of the other state indicators.

In FIG. 13H , device 700 determines that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since gesture 1350f was detected without device 700 detecting another gesture for lighting state indicator 1314h . As illustrated in FIG. 13H , since a determination is made that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since gesture 1350f was detected, device 700 stops displaying lighting status indicator 1314h and illuminates Move window open status indicator 1314i, door sensor status indicator 1314j, and motion sensor status indicator 1314k to the left to fill the space previously occupied by status indicator 1314h. For example, window open status indicator 1314i is adjacent to lighting status indicator 1314h of FIG. 13G , and window open status indicator 1314i is positioned emptied by lighting status indicator 1314h of FIG. 13H . occupies Because some of the status indicators have shifted to the left, an additional status indicator, ie, light sensor status indicator 1314k, is displayed anew. Door sensor status indicator 1314j, motion sensor status indicator 1314k, and light sensor status indicator 1314k are the fifth status indicator categories (eg, the fifth most urgent category, rather than the fourth status indicator category). less urgent status indicator category, sensor status indicator category). Door sensor status indicator 1314j indicates that the door sensor assigned to house 602 has detected that the door is slightly open. Motion sensor status indicator 1314k indicates that motion was detected by one or more motion sensors assigned to home 602 . Light sensor status indicator 13141 indicates that one or more door sensors have detected that one or more doors assigned to house 602 have been opened. In some embodiments, if a gesture to light status indicator 1314h is detected before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, device 700 sends a command to change the four lights back to being in an on state ( Update light status indicator 1314h to indicate that four lights are on (eg, as shown in FIG. 13F ). This ability to still view the status indicator for a predetermined period of time after the accessories associated with the status indicator change from an urgent or active state provides the user with an opportunity to easily undo the status change of the accessories. In some embodiments, if a gesture for lighting status indicator 1314h is detected before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, device 700 displays the lighting status indicator ( 1314h) maintain the display. In some of these embodiments, the device 700 maintains a display of the lighting status indicator 1314h because (eg, in FIG. 13B ) the lighting status indicator 1314h first appears in the user interface 710 . This is because the lighting status indicator 1314h indicates that the one or more lights are back to the original state where they were when displayed on the display. 13H , the device 700 detects a tap gesture 1350h on the room navigation control 722b.

As illustrated in FIG. 13I , in response to detecting the tap gesture 1350h , the device 700 displays the user interface 1360 of the home application, and the room navigation control 722b (eg, as shown in bold) same) indicates that it is selected. User interface 1360 is a user interface for controlling a number of external devices assigned to bedroom 602c, as indicated by bedroom identifier 1368 . In some embodiments, device 700 may use one or more techniques as described above with respect to displaying user interface 760 of FIG. 7G to display user interface 1360 of FIG. 13I . In some embodiments, user interface 1360 may alternatively be displayed in response to detecting tap gesture 750f3 in FIG. 7F and/or user interface 760 may display tap gesture 1350h in FIG. 13H , in some embodiments. may alternatively be displayed in response to detecting

As illustrated in FIG. 13I , user interface 1360 includes a reduced set of status indicators than the status indicators that were displayed in FIGS. 13A-13C and 13F-13H . User interface 1360 includes a reduced set of status indicators as a determination is made that respective status indicators displayed on user interface 1360 correspond to at least one device assigned to bedroom 602 . do. In other words, when displaying the user interface 1360 for controlling a plurality of external devices assigned to the bedroom 602c, the device 700 displays a status that does not correspond to at least one device assigned to the bedroom 602c. stop displaying characters.

As illustrated in FIG. 13I , the reduced set of status indicators includes a carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a , a climate status indicator 1314f , and an open window status indicator 1314i . In particular, climate condition indicator 1314f of FIG. 13I represents a temperature associated with a thermostat assigned to a bedroom but does not represent the humidity and/or air quality information presented by climate condition indicator 1314f of FIG. 13B . Here, the climate condition indicator 1314f of FIG. 13I does not represent humidity and/or air quality information because humidity and air quality sensors are not assigned to the bedroom. However, the climate indicator 1314f of FIG. 13I indicates the temperature associated with the thermostat control since at least one thermostat is assigned to the bedroom. Moreover, the status indicator 1314f of FIG. 13I also indicates (eg, compared to 1314f of FIG. 13B ) that the thermostat control is causing the heating system to be activated (eg, the room is connected to the device the thermostat control is controlling). ), which is indicated by the upward arrow on status indicator 1314f in FIG. 13I . Accordingly, status indicators corresponding to multiple devices of the same type display information regarding one or more of the types of devices when navigating to user interfaces corresponding to different parts or rooms of the house 602 . can stop Moreover, the window open status indicator 1314i of FIG. 13I has been changed to indicate that one window is open as opposed to indicating that seven windows are open as illustrated in FIG. 13H . Window open status indicator 1314i in FIG. 13I has been changed to indicate that one window is open, since only one bedroom window has a window blind adjuster device assigned to bedroom 602c. In FIG. 13I , device 700 detects a press and hold gesture 1350i that is for window open status indicator 1314i .

As illustrated in FIG. 13J , in response to detecting the press and hold gesture 1350i , the device 700 displays a user interface 1370 that includes a window blind adjustable control 1318i . 13J , device 700 detects gesture 1350j (down swipe gesture) on window blind adjustable control 1318i. As illustrated in FIG. 13K , in response to detecting gesture 1350j , device 700 removes the window blind adjuster device from 100% open (as indicated by indication 1372 in FIG. 31J ) ( Send a command to the window blind adjuster device assigned to bedroom 602b to change to 58% open (eg, as indicated by indication 1372 in FIG. 13K ).

In particular, in FIG. 13J , device 700 displays window blind adjustable control 1318i, wherein selection of window blind adjustable control 1318i indicates the state of the window blind adjuster device, window blind adjustable control 1318i ) (eg, “open”, 100% open) and the state opposite (eg, “closed”, 0% open) as indicated by the window blind adjustable control 1318i (eg, “open”) ) and change to a different state. Thus, selection of the window blind adjustable control 1318i causes the user to change the window blind adjuster device by directing a tap gesture to the window open status indicator 1314i of FIG. Change the coordinator device. In some embodiments, device 700 displays a user interface similar to user interface 1340 of FIG. 13D when window open status indicator 1314i of FIG. 13I indicates more than a predetermined number of devices. Thus, when there are more than a predetermined number of devices indicated by window status indicator 1314i of FIG. 13I , multiple controls for controlling the multiple devices are displayed, and selection of one of the respective controls determines whether the device to change to the opposite state (eg, on/off state, open/closed state, locked/unlocked state). In some embodiments, device 700 allows a user to access one or more devices when there are fewer than a predetermined number of devices than when there are more than a predetermined number of devices indicated by the status indicator. Displays controls that allow more (or different) control. In some embodiments, if less than a predetermined number of devices indicated by the status indicator are present and a tap-and-hold gesture is detected on the status indicator, device 700 indicates that more than a predetermined number of devices indicate the status indicator. When displayed as being in a specific state by a ruler, more control units for controlling a specific device are displayed than the number of control units displayed for the specific device.

13L-13N illustrate example user interfaces displayed in response to detecting gestures for other status indicators. In some embodiments, the gesture for other status indicators is a gesture or gesture of the same type as gesture 1350c (eg, press and hold gesture) for displaying the respective user interfaces of FIGS. 13L-13N . may be the same type of gesture as 1350f (eg, a tap gesture). Accordingly, in some embodiments, device 700 displays the respective user interface of FIGS. 13L-13N in response to detecting either type of gesture (eg, a press-and-hold gesture or a tap gesture).

13L illustrates a device 700 displaying a user interface 1382 . User interface 1370 is displayed in response to device 700 detecting a gesture for carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a of FIG. 13A . As illustrated in FIG. 13L , user interface 1382 includes external device controls 718 , where each external device control represents the status of a carbon monoxide device assigned to home 602 . As shown by user interface 1382, the bedroom carbon monoxide sensor is triggered (eg, as indicated by bedroom carbon monoxide control 718k), and the kitchen carbon monoxide sensor and living room carbon monoxide sensor are triggered (eg, as indicated by bedroom carbon monoxide control 718k). ) is not triggered. Accordingly, in response to device 700 detecting a gesture for a status indicator (eg, carbon monoxide status indicator 1314a ) within a status indicator category other than the fourth status indicator category, device 700 may each displays a particular type of device controls corresponding to a status indicator of a category of , wherein the device controls have one or more visual appearances indicating a state in which the device corresponding to the respective control is present. In some embodiments, user interface 1370 is displayed using techniques similar to those described above with respect to FIGS. 13D and 13E .

13M illustrates device 700 displaying user interface 1384 . User interface 1384 is displayed in response to device 700 detecting a gesture for climate condition indicator 1314f of FIG. 13B . As illustrated in FIG. 13L , user interface 1384 includes controls corresponding to multiple types of devices because climate condition indicator 1314f (eg, as described above with respect to FIG. 13B ) is like) because it represents the status of multiple types of devices. For example, in FIG. 13L , user interface 1384 includes controls for controlling thermostat devices (eg, bedroom thermostat control 718n and living room thermostat control 718r), air quality sensors for controlling air quality sensors. control units (eg, a kitchen air quality sensor control unit 718o and a living room air quality sensor control unit 718r), and a control unit for controlling the humidity sensor (eg, a kitchen humidity sensor control unit 718p).

13N illustrates a device 700 displaying a user interface 1386 . User interface 1386 is displayed in response to device 700 detecting a gesture for motion sensor status indicator 1314k of FIG. 13H . As illustrated in FIG. 13N , user interface 1386 includes controls corresponding to motion sensors assigned to house 602 . User interface 1386 is displayed using techniques similar to those described above with respect to FIGS. 13D, 13E, and 13L.

14 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing external devices using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1400 includes a computer system (eg, 100, 300, 500, 634, 674, 700, 701, 850). Some operations of the method 1400 are selectively combined, the orders of some operations are selectively changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

As described below, the method 1400 provides an intuitive way to manage external devices. The method reduces the user's cognitive burden on managing external devices, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to perceive device state faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

The computer system, via the display generating component, is configured to include a plurality of accessory devices (eg, light bulbs, windows, switches, outlets, locks (eg, door locks, window locks), televisions) of a first accessory type. ) is in a first state (eg, on, off, open, closed, locked, unlocked) (eg, a graphical representation and corresponding text (eg, two light bulbs are on)) indicating a first state indication. (e.g., as part of displaying a first user interface (e.g., a user interface for controlling a set of accessory devices) that includes (e.g., comprises displaying) a ruler (e.g., 1314g, 1314h, 1314i) Display (eg, 1402 ). The plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type include a first accessory device 1404 of a first accessory type and in a first state, and a second accessory device 1406 of a first accessory type and in a first state, and , wherein the second accessory device is different from the first accessory device. In some embodiments, the first status indicator does not indicate an accessory device of a first accessory type that is not in the first state (eg, is in a second state) (eg, the first status indicator is not in the first state). does not indicate (eg, if selected) one or more devices of the first accessory type (eg, in a second state) or control). In some embodiments, the first status indicator does not indicate an accessory device of an accessory type other than the first accessory type, regardless of the current status of the accessory device of the accessory type other than the first accessory type.

The computer system detects (eg, 1408 ) a gesture (eg, 1350a - 1350c, 1350f) (eg, via one or more input devices) while displaying the first status indicator.

In response to detecting the gesture 1410 and the gesture is a gesture of a first type (eg, 1350f) (eg, a tap gesture) and for a first status indicator (eg, 1350h) (eg, a first status indicator) Upon determining that on, at a location corresponding to the first status indicator, the computer system to (eg, a server, a hub device in communication with a plurality of devices including a first accessory device and a second accessory device, a first accessory device, a second accessory device))) (eg, a second accessory device) 1 The first accessory device (for performing an action to change the state of the accessory device) and the second accessory device (eg, for performing an action to change the state of the second accessory device) are different from the first state (eg, and vice versa (eg, on/off, lock/unlock, open/close) cause change to a second state ( 1412 ). In some embodiments, as part of putting the first accessory device and the second accessory device in the second state, the computer system (eg, before a gesture is detected) causes the computer system to enter the second state (or any other state different from the first state). state) does not cause one or more accessory devices to perform any actions and/or change state.

In response to detecting the gesture 1410 and wherein the gesture is a second type of gesture (eg, 1350c) (eg, a press and hold gesture) different from the first type of gesture and for a first status indicator (eg, 1314h) Upon determining that the as part), wherein a selection (eg, 1350d) of a first accessory control user interface object (eg, via a gesture that is a first type of gesture (eg, a tap gesture)) of the first accessory control user interface object (eg, via initiating a process) (And, in some embodiments, the process sends the command to one or more devices (eg, a server, a hub device in communication with a plurality of accessory devices (eg, including first and second accessory devices), (second for performing an action (eg, changing the state of the first accessory device) without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state)))) ) cause the first accessory device to change to the second state (eg, the second accessory device remains in the first state after it completes putting the first accessory device in the first state) 1414 . In some embodiments, while displaying the first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the first accessory device, the computer system causes a gesture to the first accessory control user interface object (eg, a gesture to the first accessory control user interface object). a first type of gesture); In response to detecting the gesture on the first accessory control user interface object, the computer system causes the second accessory device to be in the second state (eg, to perform an action to change the first accessory device) ) put the first accessory device in the second state (eg, the second accessory device remains in the first state after putting the first accessory device in the first state is complete). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the gesture for the first status indicator and upon determining that the gesture is a second gesture that is different from the first gesture (eg, a long press gesture), the computer system is configured to: display a third accessory control user interface object corresponding to a third accessory device of the first accessory device type and not in the first state (eg, in the second state); In response to detecting the gesture to the third accessory control user interface object, the computer system, without changing states of the first accessory device and the second accessory device (eg, the first accessory device and the second accessory device without putting it in the second state), put the third accessory device in the first state (eg, to perform an action that changes the third accessory device). In some embodiments, the second user interface controls one (eg, or any) accessory that corresponds to an accessory device that is not of the first type (eg, of a second accessory type that is different from the first accessory type). It does not contain user interface objects. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the gesture for the first status indicator and upon determining that the gesture is a second gesture different from the first gesture (eg, a press and hold gesture), the computer system: It is of a different accessory type and does not display accessory control user interface objects displayed via the second user interface. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the gesture for the first status indicator and upon determining that the gesture is a second gesture different from the first gesture (eg, a press and hold gesture), the computer system displays the first status indicator. Stop displaying the ruler. Based on the type of gesture detected, when the gesture is for the first status indicator, performing different actions provides the user with more control options without cluttering the user interface. Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Allowing the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state provides the user with one control that allows multiple devices to change state, which causes the multiple devices to change state. It reduces the number of inputs needed to make Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) -Makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling users to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is different from the first type of gesture and is a second type of gesture (eg, 1350c) for a first status indicator (eg, 1314h), the computer system generates a display Display a second accessory control user interface object (eg, 718b, 718f - 718j) corresponding to the second accessory device via the component and concurrently with the first accessory control user interface object (eg, 718b, 718f - 718j). In some embodiments, selection of the second accessory control user interface object (eg, via a gesture that is a first type of gesture (eg, a tap gesture)) is (eg, via a process (and, in some embodiments, The process transmits the command to one or more devices (eg, a server, a hub device in communication with a plurality of accessory devices (eg, including first and second accessory devices), a second accessory device (not the first accessory device) ))) causing the second accessory device to change to the second state, without causing the first accessory device to change to the second state. In some embodiments, while displaying a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second accessory device, the computer system may cause a gesture to the first accessory control user interface object (eg, a gesture to the first accessory control user interface object). a first type of gesture); In response to detecting the gesture on the second accessory control user interface object, the computer system causes the computer system to, without placing the first accessory device in the second state (eg, to perform an action that changes the second accessory device) ) put the second accessory device in the second state (eg, the first accessory device remains in the first state after putting the second accessory device in the first state is complete). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a gesture on the second accessory control user interface object, the second accessory control user interface object has a first visual appearance (eg, text, size, color, depressed state (eg, depressed)). released, depressed)) to a second visual appearance (eg text, size, color, depressed state (eg, released, depressed)) different from the first visual appearance. (eg, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is different from the first type of gesture and is a second type of gesture for the first status indicator) concurrently with a first accessory control corresponding to the first accessory device and corresponding to the second accessory device. Displaying the second accessory control user interface object provides the user with more control options for controlling individual accessory devices without cluttering the user interface. Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the gesture displays a second status indicator (eg, 1314g, 1314i) indicating that a plurality of accessory devices of a second accessory type different from the first accessory type are in a third state, the first status indication is detected during simultaneous display with the user, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of the second accessory type are of the second accessory type and are in a third state (eg, a state different from the first state and the second state); and a fourth accessory device of the second accessory type and in a third state. In some embodiments, a third accessory device of a second accessory type and in a second state and a fourth accessory device of a second accessory type and in a second state are different from the first accessory device and the second accessory device. In some embodiments, the gesture is a first type of gesture (eg, similar to 1350f) (eg, a tap gesture) and is for a second status indicator (eg, 1314g, 1314i) (eg, second status indicator). Upon determining that on, at a location corresponding to the second status indicator, the computer system devices (eg, a server, a hub device that communicates with a plurality of devices including a first accessory device and a second accessory device, and a third accessory device and a fourth accessory device)) (eg, The first accessory device and the second accessory device change to a different state (eg, a second state different from the first state (eg, opposite (eg on/off, locked/unlocked, open/closed)) cause the third accessory device and the fourth accessory device to change to a fourth state different from the third state). In some embodiments, the gesture is a second type of gesture (eg, similar to 1350c) (eg, a press-and-hold gesture) and is for a second status indicator (eg, 1314g, 1314i) (eg, second state). Upon determining that on the indicator, at a location corresponding to the second status indicator, the computer system, via the display creation component, creates a third accessory control user interface object corresponding to the third accessory device (eg, as part of displaying the second user interface). In some embodiments, selection of the third accessory control user interface object (eg, via a gesture that is a first type of gesture (eg, a tap gesture)) is (eg, via a process (and, in some embodiments, The process includes a hub device that communicates the command to one or more devices (eg, a server, a plurality of accessory devices (eg, including first, second, third, and fourth accessory devices), (a fourth accessory device without causing the fourth accessory device to change to the fourth state (and, in some embodiments, via the display creation component, to the first accessory device and/or or without displaying (eg, as part of displaying the second user interface) a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second accessory control user interface object (eg, changing a state of the first accessory device) cause the third accessory device to change to the fourth state (eg, the fourth accessory device remains in the third state after the third accessory device is in the fourth state) to perform an action. In some embodiments, the gesture is a second type of gesture (eg, a press-and-hold gesture) and is relative to a second status indicator (eg, on the second status indicator, at a location corresponding to the second status indicator). ), the computer system simultaneously displays the fourth accessory control user interface object along with the third accessory control user interface object. In some embodiments, when a fourth accessory control user interface object is selected, the computer system (eg, via a process (and in some embodiments, the process sends instructions to one or more devices (eg, a server, (eg, , a hub device in communication with a plurality of accessory devices (including first, second, third, fourth accessory devices), including sending to a fourth accessory device (not a third accessory device))) causes the fourth accessory device to change to the fourth state without causing the third accessory device to change to the fourth state. Performing different actions based on the status indicator to which the gesture is applied and the type of gesture detected provides the user with more control options for controlling different accessory device types without cluttering the user interface. Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. Allowing the third accessory device and the fourth accessory device to change to the fourth state provides a user with one control that reduces the number of inputs required to cause multiple devices to change state and cause multiple devices to change state. provide to Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) -Makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling users to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the fifth accessory device (eg, the device represented by 718b in FIG. 13A ) is the first accessory device type and the fifth accessory device (eg, the device represented by 718b in FIG. 13A ) is the first Upon determining that it is in the state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type includes a fifth accessory device (eg, different from the first accessory device and the second accessory device) (eg, as indicated by 1314h). In some embodiments, the fifth accessory device (eg, the device represented by 718G in FIG. 13A ) is the first accessory device type and the fifth accessory device (eg, the device represented by 718G in FIG. 13A ) is the first In accordance with the determination not to be in the state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type do not include a fifth accessory device (eg, as indicated by 1314h). In some embodiments, according to the determination that the fifth accessory device is not the first accessory device type and the fifth accessory device is in the first state, the plurality of accessory devices of the fifth accessory type does not include the fifth accessory device . In some embodiments, upon determining that the fifth accessory device is not the first accessory device type and the fifth accessory device is not in the first state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type do not include the fifth accessory device. does not Controlling accessory devices of a first accessory device type that is in a first state and providing a status indicator that does not control accessory devices of a first accessory device type that is not in the first state is an accessory device that meets certain prescribed conditions. Automatically provide the user with status indicators to control them. Performing an action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) is It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first type of gesture is a tap gesture (eg, 1350f) (eg, a gesture detected (eg, via one or more input devices) for less than a predetermined period of time). In some embodiments, the second type of gesture is a press and hold gesture (eg, 1350c) (eg, a gesture detected (eg, via one or more input devices) for more than a predetermined period of time).

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the gesture and that the gesture is a third type of gesture (eg, 1350a) (eg, a swipe gesture, a gesture of moving in a direction (eg, lateral)) (eg, and upon the determination that it is for the first status indicator), the computer system displays a previously undisplayed status indicator (eg, 1314f of FIG. 13B ) (eg, by scrolling the status indicators) (eg, previously A status indicator that was not displayed in indicates that a plurality of accessory devices of an accessory different from the first accessory device type are in the same state). In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a third type of gesture, stop displaying the first status indicator (eg, by scrolling the first status indicator out of view). In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a third type of gesture, moving the plurality of displayed status indicators (eg, in the direction of the gesture (eg, left, right, up, down, etc.) After the status indicators of are moved, the first status indicator stops being displayed while one or more status indicators that were not displayed prior to detecting the third type of gesture are displayed. In some embodiments, one or more controls that are not status indicators (eg, scene control, external accessory device controls) remain displayed after the gesture is detected. Performing different actions when the third type of gesture is for the first status indicator provides the user with more control options (eg, more status indicators) without cluttering the user interface. Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, as part of causing the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to the second state, the computer system determines that the first accessory device and the second accessory device are of a first accessory type (eg, lights, To perform some type of action based on door locks, blinds, temperature controllers (eg, turn off lights, unlock door locks, open blinds by a certain percentage, turn off air conditioner/heater ) do. Having the first accessory device and the second accessory device perform some type of action based on the first accessory type allows the computer system to cause the specific action to be performed based on certain prescribed conditions. Performing an action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) is It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, prior to detecting the gesture, the computer system determines that a plurality of accessory devices of a second accessory type adjacent to the first status indicator (eg, different from the first accessory type) are in a third state. a third status indicator (eg, 1314b) and a plurality of third accessory types adjacent to the third status indicator (eg, 1314e) (eg, different from the second accessory type and the first accessory type) display a fourth status indicator (eg, 1314c ) indicating that the accessory devices of the ' are in the fourth state. In some embodiments, the first status indicator, the third status indicator, and the fourth status indicator have respective status indicator categories (eg, alarms (eg, co, co2, smoke, leaks, alarms), action required (eg unresponsive accessories, account error, low battery, updated availability), significant status (important ones: house temperature, open doors or windows) ), quick actions (eg, categories to reverse the accessory's state, unlock door, open windows, 5 lights on, 2 fans on), sensors (eg humidity level, light level "34 lux", etc.) )) (eg, respective status indicator categories with each respective status indicator). In some embodiments, while displaying the first status indicator, the third status indicator, and the fourth status indicator in order, the computer system indicates that a fifth status indicator is to be displayed (eg, (eg, the first status receive an indication that one or more states of an accessory device type different from the accessory device types indicated by the indicator, the second status indicator, and the third status indicator have changed; In response to receiving the indication that the fifth status indicator should be displayed, in response to (1) determining that the fifth status indicator is within a first status indicator category (eg, the same status indicator category as the first status indicator); , the computer system displays a fifth status indicator at a first location (eg, a location adjacent to the first status indicator); (2) upon determining that the fifth status indicator is within a second status indicator category (eg, a status indicator category different from the first status indicator category) (eg, the same status indicator category as the third status indicator); , display the fifth status indicator at a second location different from the first location (eg, a location adjacent to the third status indicator); (3) the fifth status indicator is a third status indicator category (eg, a status indicator category different from the first status indicator category and the third status indicator category) (eg, the same status indicator as the fourth status indicator) category), display the fifth status indicator at a third location (eg, adjacent to the fourth status indicator) different from the first location and the second location. Displaying the status indicators in an order based on their respective categories provides the user with improved feedback regarding the category or importance of a particular status indicator, and allows the user to quickly recognize the category to which a particular status indicator corresponds. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the computer system detects a change in state of a respective accessory device of the first accessory type. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a change in the state of the respective accessory device of the first accessory type and upon determining that the state of the respective accessory device has changed to the first state, the computer system configures the respective accessory device to add to a plurality of accessory devices (eg, light bulbs, windows, switches, outlets, locks (eg, door locks, window locks), televisions) of a first accessory type in a first state . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a change in the state of the respective accessory device of the first accessory type and that the state of the respective accessory device has changed to the second state (or alternatively, the first state is Upon determining that it has been changed to not, the computer system sets the respective accessory device to a plurality of accessory devices (eg, light bulbs, windows, switches, receptacles, locks (eg, light bulbs, windows, switches, etc.) of the first accessory type in the first state). , door locks, window locks), televisions). Thus, as additional accessories of the respective type are detected as being in the respective state, the additional accessories are added to the respective status indicator, causing the additional accessories to be controlled by activating the status indicator; As it is detected that some accessories of the respective type are no longer in their respective states, the accessories are removed from their respective status indicators, such that the removed accessories are not controlled by activating the status indicators. Updating the plurality of accessory devices based on the status of the accessories allows the system to allow the user to quickly change the status of accessories of the same type and status and to individually access the accessories (eg, via press and hold). allow to be Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first status indicator includes an indication of a number of accessory devices displayed (or updated) based on a current number of accessory devices of the first accessory type in the first state. In some embodiments, prior to detecting the gesture, the first status indicator includes an indication of a first number of accessory devices (eg, of a first accessory type and in a first state). In some embodiments, upon determining that a tenth accessory device of a first accessory device type has been changed to be in a first state, the computer system causes a different indication of the first number of accessory devices (eg, being of a second accessory type and Update the first status indicator to include an indication of the second number of accessory devices (in the second state). In some embodiments, upon determining that the second accessory has been changed to not in the first state, the computer system configures a third number of accessories different from the indication of the first number of accessory devices and the indication of the second number of accessory devices. Update the first status indicator to include an indication of devices. In some embodiments, the second number of accessory devices is greater than the first number of accessory devices and the third number of accessory devices is less than the first number of accessory devices. Displaying a status indicator that includes an indication based on the current number of accessory devices allows the user to quickly recognize the number of devices to which the status indicated by the status indicator corresponds and how many more have been entered on the status indicator. It provides users with improved feedback as to whether the devices could potentially affect them. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a first type of gesture (eg, 1350f) and is for a first status indicator (eg, 1350h), the computer system triggers a predetermined period of time (eg, 1 second, 5 seconds). . In some embodiments, upon determining that the second gesture, which is a gesture of the first type, is received after receiving the gesture of the first type and before a predetermined time, withholding from displaying the first status indicator is withheld. In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator and upon determining that the status indicator is within a first category, the computer system configures the accessory device represented by the status indicator. stop displaying the status indicator when they have changed to a specific state (eg, lights are off, doors are locked, alarms are not active, etc.) after a second predetermined period of time and/or after a predetermined period of time. In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for a first status indicator and upon determining that the status indicator is in a second category different from the first category, the computer system sends the status indicator to display a status indicator when and/or after a predetermined period of time the accessory devices represented by have changed to a particular state (eg, lights are off, doors are locked, alarms are not active, etc. after a second predetermined period of time) don't stop Ceasing to display the status indicator after detecting input of the first type of gesture provides the user with visual feedback that an action has been performed to change the status of accessory devices controlled via the status indicator. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a first status indicator (eg, 1314h) is displayed in a first location when a gesture is detected. In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a gesture of a first type (eg, 1350f) and is for a first status indicator (eg, 1314h), the computer system in the first location (eg, a first status indicator (eg, 1314h)) . In some embodiments, the sixth status indicator was adjacent to the first status indicator before the gesture was detected. In some embodiments, displaying a status indicator different from the first status indicator in the first position includes moving, via animation, the status indicator different from the first status indicator from the third position to the first position. do. Ceasing to display the status indicator and displaying the adjacent status indicator at that location after detecting input of the first type of gesture may result in deleting the status indicator and adding a new status indicator (eg, adjacent status indicator) ( reduce the number of inputs required to display on the display (eg, via a display generating component). Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) -Makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling users to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a gesture of a first type (eg, 1350i) and is for a first status indicator (eg, 1314h), the computer system determines that the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type (eg, A plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type have changed state (eg, not in a first state, to a second state (eg, not in a first state) from indicating that they are in a first state (eg, or displayed in a first visual appearance). visually update the first status indicator (eg, 1314h in FIG. 13G ) to change the first status indicator to indicate (eg, or as displayed with a second visual appearance that is different from the first visual appearance). In some embodiments, the first status indicator is visually updated and then ceases to be displayed after a predetermined period of time. In some embodiments, upon determining that the gesture is a gesture of a second type (or a gesture of a third type) and is for a first status indicator, the computer system sets the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type to the second state. suspend updating the first status indicator to indicate that it is in (and/or maintain the first status indicator indicating (eg, to indicate) that the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type are in the first state ). Updating the status indicator to indicate that the plurality of accessory devices changed state after detecting input of the first type of gesture is visual feedback that an action was performed to change the state of accessory devices controlled through the status indicator. is provided to the user. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a first status indicator (eg, 1314h) is displayed on a first user interface (eg, 710). In some embodiments, the computer system prompts (eg, while displaying a first status indicator on the first user interface) to display a second user interface (eg, 1360 ) that is different from the first user interface (eg, 710 ). A request (eg, 1350h) is received. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request (eg, 1350h) to display a second user interface, the computer system displays a status indicator (eg, 1350h) indicating that one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type are in a first state. Display a second user interface (eg, 1360 ) including, for example, 1350i in FIG. 13I , wherein the second user interface (eg, 1360 ) (eg, the currently displayed user interface) includes a first group of accessory devices. (eg, a group of devices assigned to a group representing a part of a building (eg, house) (eg, a room (eg, bedroom, living room, office, garage), entrance)) and the first accessory device is an accessory device according to the determination that it corresponds to the first group of (eg, and while the first accessory device is in the first state), the one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type include the first accessory device; that the second user interface (eg, 1360 ) (eg, the currently displayed user interface) corresponds to the first group of accessory devices and that the first accessory device does not correspond to the first group of accessory devices (eg, and the first according to the determination (while the accessory device is in the first state), the one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type do not include the first accessory device. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, the computer system stops displaying the first user interface comprising the first user interface. based on whether a user interface including a status corresponds to a group of accessory devices and whether a particular device (eg, of the same status and accessory type) associated with the status indicator corresponds to a group of accessory devices. ) displaying a status indicator indicating the status of the plurality of devices when certain prescribed conditions are met automatically provides the user with a status indicator indicating the plurality of devices associated with the user interface corresponding to a particular group of accessory devices do. Performing an action when a set of conditions are met without requiring additional user input (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) is It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently. a plurality of devices based on whether a user interface comprising a status corresponds to a group of accessory devices and whether a particular device (eg, of the same status and accessory type) associated with the status indicator corresponds to a group of accessory devices. Displaying a status indicator indicating the status of the devices provides the user with visual feedback regarding the status indicators indicating devices relevant to the particular user interfaces being displayed. Providing improved visual feedback to the user improves the operability of the computer system and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the computer system) and user- It makes the system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the computer system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, prior to detecting the gesture (eg, 1350a - 1350c, 1350f), a second indicating that one or more accessory devices of the third accessory type are in a seventh state (eg, on/off, open, closed) 8 A status indicator is displayed. In some embodiments, the one or more accessory devices include an eighth accessory device of a third accessory type. In some embodiments, the gesture (eg, 1350f, 1350i) is a second type of gesture (eg, a press-and-hold gesture) and for an eighth status indicator (eg, 1314h) (eg, on the eighth status indicator) of (at a location corresponding to the eighth status indicator) and the eighth status indicator (eg, 1314H in FIG. 13I ) is less than a predetermined number of accessory devices of the third accessory type in the seventh state Upon a determination (eg, only one accessory of the third accessory type is in the seventh state) that corresponds to (and/or indicates) (eg, less than two), the computer system configures the computer system to correspond to (eg, less than two) the eighth accessory device. Display the eighth accessory control user interface object (eg, 1318 ) (eg, with more control and/or precision than the ninth accessory control user interface object). In some embodiments, selection of the eighth accessory control user interface object causes the eighth accessory device to be in an eighth state (eg, 80% bright, 20% bright, 40% open, 20% open, completely opposite to a seventh state) Corresponds to a characteristic (eg, color of lights (eg, blue, red, green, yellow, white)) that can be represented by the device (eg, color of lights (eg, blue, red, green, yellow, white)) that is different from the non-state, characteristic (eg, on/off) corresponding to the seventh state. state) to be changed. In some embodiments, the gesture (eg, 1350f, 1350i) is a second type of gesture (eg, a press-and-hold gesture) and for an eighth status indicator (eg, 1314h) (eg, on the eighth status indicator) of at least a predetermined number of accessory devices of the third accessory type in which the eighth status indicator (eg, 1314H in FIG. 13I ) is in the seventh state) and Upon determining that it corresponds to (and/or indicates) (eg, two or more), the computer system causes a ninth accessory control user interface object (eg, a control such as, eg, 718h) corresponding to the eighth accessory device. is displayed. In some embodiments, selection of the ninth accessory control user interface object (eg, without displaying the eighth accessory control user interface object) causes the eighth accessory device to be in a different ninth state (eg, on/off) from the eighth state. off, open/closed, the state opposite to the seventh state). In some embodiments, determining that the number of accessory user interface control objects corresponding to the eighth accessory device indicates that the eighth status indicator indicates that less than a predetermined number (eg, 2) of the third accessory type is in the seventh state. greater when a determination is made that the eighth status indicator indicates that less than a predetermined number (eg, two) of accessory devices of the third accessory type are in the seventh state than was made. In some embodiments, the eighth accessory control user interface object is larger than the ninth accessory control user interface object. Based on the number of controls represented by the status indicator, displaying controls that, when selected, differently change the accessory device, makes the device provide additional or different controls in some situations without cluttering the UI. do. Providing additional control of the system without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the system) It improves the operability of the system and makes the user-system interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the system and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the system more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, according to a respective status indicator (eg, an eighth status indicator) corresponding to a single accessory device, each status indicator includes a name (eg, alphanumeric text) of the accessory device. According to a respective status indicator (eg, an eighth status indicator) corresponding to the plurality of accessory devices, each status indicator includes an indication (eg, a numeric representation) of a number of accessory devices being represented.

In some embodiments, the computer system may provide different types of status indicators (eg, 1314a - 1314f, 1314j - 1314l) (eg, climate control, sensors (eg, different types of sensors) can be combined in a single status indicator. )) and, in response to detecting the tap, display a user interface (eg, 1382 , 1384 , 1386 ) for controlling a plurality of types of devices associated with other types of status indicators. In some embodiments, device 700 does not stop displaying another type of control after detecting a tap thereon.

Note that the details of the processes described above with respect to method 1400 (eg, FIG. 14 ) are also applicable in a manner similar to the methods described above. For example, method 1400 optionally includes one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to methods 800 and 1000 . For another example, the audio message sent in method 800 may be a change or more status indicators as described above with respect to method 1400 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

15A-15F illustrate example user interfaces for playing audio messages, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes of FIG. 16 .

15A illustrates a device 700 displaying a user interface 702 that includes affordances 704 . As illustrated in FIG. 15A , a multicast notification 1502 is displayed over a portion of the user interface 702 . Multicast notification 1502 indicates that audio multicast messages have been sent from John and other sets to a group of devices assigned to home 602 that includes device 700 . In other words, because device 700 is assigned to home 602 , device 700 has received audio multicast messages from John and the other sets. The multicast notification 1502 includes a playback representation 1504 . In some embodiments, playback representation 1504 is selectable. In some embodiments, the multicast notification 1502 may include other multicast messages described above (eg, multicast notification 708a , multicast notification 708 , multicast notification 904 , multicast notification 906a ). , including one or more features, as described above with respect to multicast notification 906b , multicast notification 908a , multicast notification 908b , multicast notification 908c , multicast notification 910 ). can do. In some embodiments, other multicast messages described above may include one or more features of multicast notification 1502 (eg, playback representation 1504 ). In FIG. 15A , device 700 detects tap gesture 1550a on multicast notification 1502 .

15B-15F illustrate example user interfaces for playing (eg, automatically) audio multicast messages. In some embodiments, the user interfaces described in connection with FIGS. 15B-15F are one or more user interfaces described above, such as the user interfaces of FIGS. 9I and 9J and/or the user interfaces of FIGS. 9M-9P . Instead, it may be displayed.

As illustrated in FIG. 15B , in response to detecting the tap gesture 1550a , the device 700 displays a user interface 1520 overlaid on a portion of the user interface 702 , and a current caller ID 1322a ) automatically (eg, without intervening user input after detecting tap gesture 1550a) playback of an audio multicast message received from John. In some embodiments, as part of initiating playback of audio, device 700 outputs audio through one or more speakers electronically coupled to device 700 .

As illustrated in FIG. 15B , user interface 1520 includes a multicast house identifier 1532 that indicates that audio multicast messages that have been sent to a group of devices associated with house 602 are being played. The user interface 1520 also includes a multicast recording affordance 736 , a current caller ID 1522a , graphical caller indications 1524 , and a count indication 930 . In some embodiments, device 700 takes into account multicast recording affordance 736 , current caller indication 1522a , graphical caller indications 1524 , and count indication 930 to display and operate the device, The one used by 700 to display and operate, respectively, taking into account the multicast recording affordance 736, current caller indications 922a, 922b, graphical caller indications 924a, 924b, and count indication 930 described above, respectively. The techniques described above are used.

Referring again to FIG. 15A , notification 1502 indicated that four audio multicast messages were received (eg, “JOHN AND 3 OTHERS”) and played back. Accordingly, in FIG. 15B , user interface 1520 includes graphical sender indications 1524 corresponding to portions of received messages. In FIG. 15B , graphical caller indications 1524 include graphical caller indications 1524a - 1524c . Graphical representation 1524a corresponds to the first audio multicast message that was received from "John." Graphical representation 1524b corresponds to a second audio multicast message received (or transmitted) after the first audio multicast message. Graphical representation 1524c corresponds to a third audio multicast message received (or transmitted) after the second audio multicast message. In particular, in FIG. 15A , the user interface 1520 does not include a graphical representation corresponding to the fourth audio multicast message because it is determined that no more than a predetermined number (eg, three) or fewer graphical representations are to be displayed simultaneously. because this has been done

Graphical representations 1524a-1524c correspond to different multicast messages sent by different users (or devices), illustrated by graphical representations 1524a-1524c depicting different representations. Graphical representation 1524a includes a visual representation of the sender (eg, “John”) (eg, the determined sender) of the first audio multicast message. Graphical representation 1524b includes a visual representation of the device (eg, speaker) that recorded the second audio multicast message. Graphical representation 1524c includes a visual representation of text corresponding to the sender of the third audio multicast message (e.g., “EA” for “Emma Appleseed,” who is the person associated with home 602 as shown in FIG. 7A ). . Graphical representation 1524b includes a visual representation of the device instead of a visual representation of the sender, since who generated the second audio multicast message cannot be determined. Graphical representation 1524c includes a visual representation of text instead of a visual representation of the user, since device 700 does not have access to the visual representation of the user (eg, Emily). In some embodiments, the multiple graphical representations include identical visual representations when a determination is made that audio multicast messages corresponding to the graphical representations were transmitted by the same sender.

As illustrated in FIG. 15B , graphical representation 1524a is the largest graphical representation displayed on user interface 1520 , and is displayed along with audio indication 1524a1 (eg, circles surrounding graphical representation 1524a ). do. As indicated by the current caller ID 1522a, the first audio multicast message from John is currently playing. Accordingly, graphical representation 1524a is the largest graphical representation and is displayed along with audio representation 1524a1 to indicate that an audio multicast message from John is currently being played. In some embodiments, the audio representation 1524a1 is dynamic and changes in size as the first audio multicast message is being played. Graphical representation 1524b is the second largest graphical representation displayed on user interface 1520 because the second audio multicast message is the next audio multicast message awaiting playback by device 700 . Graphical indication 1524c indicates the third largest audio multicast message displayed on user interface 1520 because the third audio multicast message is the next audio multicast message awaiting playback by device 700 after the second audio multicast message. It is a graphic display. In FIG. 15B , device 700 indicates that a first audio multicast message will end within a predetermined period (eg, 0 seconds, 1 second) (or that a next message (eg, second message) will begin within a predetermined period of time) ) to decide.

In response to determining that the first audio multicast message will (or has ended) within a predetermined period of time (eg, based on a tap gesture on skip affordance 1534 , without user input), device 700 is configured to: Rotate graphical representations 1524b and 1524c counterclockwise and stop displaying graphical representation 1524a. As illustrated in FIG. 15C , in response to determining that the first audio multicast message will end (or has ended) within a predetermined period of time, the graphical representation 1524b indicates that the graphical representation 1524a has previously been in FIG. 15B . is displayed where it was displayed, and the graphical representation 1524c is displayed where the graphical representation 1524b was previously displayed in FIG. 15B . As illustrated in FIG. 15C , graphical representation 1524a is displayed at the same size as graphical representation 1524b was previously displayed in FIG. 15B , and graphical representation 1524c is similar to that graphical representation 1524b was previously displayed in FIG. 15B , as illustrated in FIG. 15C . It is displayed in the same size as it was displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15C , current caller ID 1522b has replaced current caller ID 1522a that was previously displayed in FIG. 15B . Accordingly, in FIG. 15C , the device 700 is currently playing the second audio multicast message because the playback of the first audio multicast message has been completed by the time the user interface 1520 of FIG. 15C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15C , graphical representation 1524b is now displayed along with audio representation 1524b1 being displayed using techniques similar to those described above with respect to audio representation 1524a1 . As illustrated in FIG. 15C , graphical representation 1524c is graphical representation because device 700 is not currently outputting a third audio multicast message (eg, an audio multicast message corresponding to graphical representation 1524c). There is no audio representation surrounding (1524c). In some embodiments, device 600 displays the size of graphical representations 1524b , 1524c while transitioning between displaying user interface 1520 of FIG. 15B and displaying user interface 1520 of FIG. 15C . Displays an animation that gradually increases the values.

As illustrated in FIG. 15C , because device 700 has stopped displaying graphical indication 1524a (eg, because the first audio multicast message has ended), device 700 has a new graphical representation 1524d corresponding to the fourth audio multicast message that was sent by Jane (as shown by caller indication 1522d). Graphical representation 1524d is displayed at the same size and at the same location as graphical representation 1524c of FIG. 15B (eg, because graphical representation 1524d is now waiting a second time for audio playback). In FIG. 15C , device 700 indicates that the second audio multicast message will end within a predetermined period of time (eg, 0 to 1 second) (or that the next message (eg, third audio multicast message) will expire within a predetermined period of time) decide to start) (or end).

In response to determining that the second audio multicast message will end (or has ended) within the predetermined period of time, device 700 rotates graphical representations 1524c and 1524d counterclockwise and graphical representation 1524b stops displaying. As illustrated in FIG. 15D , in response to determining that the second audio multicast message will end within a predetermined period of time, graphical representation 1524c is displayed at the location where graphical representation 1524b was previously displayed in FIG. 15C and displayed in size, and graphical representation 1524d is displayed at the size and location where graphical representation 1524c was previously displayed in FIG. 15C .

As shown in FIG. 15D , the current sender indication 1522c has replaced the current send indication 1522b that was previously displayed in FIG. 15C . Accordingly, in FIG. 15D , the device 700 is currently playing the third audio multicast message because the playback of the second audio multicast message has been completed by the time the user interface 1520 of FIG. 15D is displayed. The device 700 plays the third audio multicast message automatically, without intervening input, in a predetermined period after the playback of the second audio multicast message ends. In some embodiments, device 700 plays a predetermined sound (eg, chime, buzz, tone) between multicast messages being played. For example, device 700 may play a first sound before automatically starting playback of a second audio multicast message, and play a second sound (eg, before automatically starting playback of a third audio multicast message). , the same chime). In some embodiments, device 600 transitions user interfaces (eg, after or before playback) during playback of the predetermined sound (eg, user interface 1520 of FIG. 15C transitions to user interface 1520 of FIG. 15D ) do). In some embodiments, in response to detecting input on skip affordance 1534 of FIG. 15C , device 700 initiates playback of a second audio message (eg, being played in FIG. 15C ) (eg, a second audio message). before reaching the end of ), starts playing a third audio message, and transitions the user interfaces (eg, user interface 1520 in FIG. 15C transitions to user interface 1520 in FIG. 15D ). In FIG. 15D , device 700 indicates that the third audio multicast message will end within a predetermined period of time (eg, 0 to 1 second) (or that the next message (eg, the fourth audio multicast message) will expire within the predetermined period of time. decide to start) (or end).

In response to determining that the third audio multicast message will end (or has ended) within the predetermined period of time, the device 700 moves the graphical indication 1524d counterclockwise (eg, changes its position and ) zoom in and stop displaying graphical representation 1524c. As illustrated in FIG. 15E , because graphical representation 1524d is the only graphical representation displayed, device 700 changes the size of graphical representation 1524d to a size greater than the size at which graphical representation 1524c was previously displayed. increase to In some embodiments, the graphical representation 1524d is displayed in a different location (eg, at the center of 1524 ) in FIG. 15E compared to the location of the graphical representation 1524a in FIG. 15B . As shown in FIG. 15E , the current sender indication 1522d replaced the current send indication 1522c that was previously displayed in FIG. 15D . Accordingly, in FIG. 15E , the device 700 responds to the fourth audio multicast message (eg, graphical display 1524d) because playback of the third audio multicast message has been completed by the time the user interface 1520 of FIG. 15E is displayed. The corresponding audio multicast message) is currently playing. The device 700 automatically intervenes the input of the fourth audio multicast message at a predetermined period after playback of the third audio multicast message ends (eg, once the third audio multicast message has ended). Without it, play.

As illustrated in FIG. 15F , after determining that playback of the fourth audio message has ended, device 700 includes graphical representations 1524a - 1524c without playing additional media (or multicast audio messages). The user interface 1520 is updated to do so. In addition to redisplaying graphical representations 1524a - 1524c , device 700 displays playback affordance 926 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting tap gesture 1550f1 on playback affordance 926 , device 700 initiates playback of a first audio multicast message, the flow described above in FIGS. 15B-15E . Repeat. In some embodiments, in response to detecting tap gesture 1550f2 (or press-and-hold gesture) on multicast affordance multicast recording affordance 736 , device 700 (e.g., multicast audio messages ( A user for recording an audio message and sending it to the group of devices associated with home 602 (eg, in response to the group of devices from which the first, second, third, fourth audio multicast messages) were transmitted. Display the interface. Accordingly, in some embodiments, device 700 responsive to detecting a tap gesture on multicast recording affordance 736 , user interface 741 of FIG. 7C1 , user interface 730 of FIG. 7C , or FIG. 7D . of the user interface 740 is displayed. In some embodiments, a tap gesture on multicast recording affordance 736 begins recording audio until a recording end input (eg, another tap gesture) is detected. Once a recording end input is detected, the recorded audio message is sent to the group of devices. In some embodiments, a press and hold gesture is detected on multicast recording affordance 736 . When a press-and-hold gesture is detected, audio recording begins. Once the end of the press and hold gesture (eg, liftoff) is detected, the audio recording ends and the recorded audio message is sent to the group of devices. In some embodiments, detecting activation of the multicast recording affordance 736 in any of the user interfaces of FIGS. 15B-15E (eg, a tap gesture, a tap-and-hold gesture) stops playback of the currently played message. and initiate the process for recording an audio message for transmission to a group of devices.

16 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for playing audio messages using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1600 includes a computer system (eg, 100, 300, 500, 634, 674, 700, 701, 850). Some operations of the method 1600 are selectively combined, the orders of some operations are selectively changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

As described below, method 1600 provides an intuitive way to play content. The method reduces the cognitive burden of the user on playing back media messages, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling a user to play media content faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

The computer system (eg, 700 ), via the display creation component, displays ( 1602 ) a media user interface (eg, 1520 ) comprising: at a first location, a first media message (eg, audio media; media; audiovisual media) (eg, 1524a in FIG. 15B ) 1604 , and at a second location different from the first location, in a second representation (eg, 1524b in FIG. 15B ) 1606 of a second media message ). In some embodiments, the media user interface includes representations of multiple (eg, some, but not all) media messages of the group of media (eg, the group of media is in an ordered set).

In response to displaying the media user interface and not based on user input corresponding to the media user interface (eg, 1520 ), the computer system (eg, 700 ) plays a first media message (eg, the first media message) output the audio and/or video of) (1608).

In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message (eg, reaching the end of the first media message by playing to the end of the first media message), the computer system (eg, 700 ) may (eg, in FIG. 15C ) (eg, as in FIG. 15C ) without displaying a representation (eg, 1524a ) (eg, any representation) corresponding to the first media message (eg, as in FIG. 15C ) of the second media message 2 Display ( 1610 ) the representation (eg, 1524b ).

Displaying representations of various media messages in different locations provides the user with feedback regarding the order of the media messages and, for example, which media message is currently playing and which media message will be played next. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, representations of a plurality (eg, some, but not all, three) of media messages are displayed at various sizes based on the order of the ordered set. In some embodiments, if the media message is earlier in the ordered set, then the representation of the corresponding media message is greater (eg, the representation of the currently playing media message is the largest, and the representation of the media message to be played next is the largest. next largest, and so on). Thus, the order of the media message is reflected in the relative sizes of its corresponding displayed representations.

According to some embodiments, displaying a first representation (eg, 1524a in FIG. 15B ) in a first location of a first media message (eg, audio media; visual media; audiovisual media) comprises a first media message (eg, and displaying a first representation (eg, 1524a ) of the audio media; visual media; audiovisual media) in a first position (eg, as in FIG. 15B ) and at a first size. According to some embodiments, displaying the second representation of the second media message (eg, 1524b in FIG. 15B ) in the second location causes the second representation (eg, 1524b) of the second media message (eg, 1524b in FIG. 15B ) to be displayed in the second location. as in) in a second location and at a second size that is different from (eg, smaller than) the first size.

Displaying representations of the various media messages in different locations can determine the order of the media message (eg, the larger size comes first in the ordered set) and, eg, which media message is currently playing and which media Provides feedback to the user as to whether the message will be played next. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

According to some embodiments, the computer system (eg, 700 ), via the display generating component, concurrently with the first presentation of the first media message at the first location and the second presentation of the second media message at the second location, in accordance with some embodiments. , in a third size different from the first size (and, optionally, different from the second size) (eg, equal to the second size, less than the second size) and at the first location and a third location different from the second location , display a third representation (eg, 1524c) of the third media message. In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message (eg, reaching the end of the first media message by playing to the end of the first media message), the computer system (eg, 700 ) is configured to: Without displaying the first representation (eg, 1524a ), via the display creation component (eg, as in FIG. 15C ), the second representation (eg, 1524b ) of the second media message at a first size and in a first position display on; The computer system (eg, 700 ) displays the third representation (eg, 1524c ) of the third media message (eg, as in FIG. 15C ) at a second size and in a second location.

Displaying representations of various media messages at different sizes at different locations provides feedback to the user regarding the order of the media messages to be played. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

According to some embodiments, the computer system (eg, 700 ) is a target of a device (eg, a plurality of devices in a home (eg, a home automation system)) from a first remote user (eg, devices including the computer system). A first media message that is a first (eg, audio) message directed to a group and a device (eg, a plurality of devices in a home (eg, a plurality of devices in a home) media messages (eg, group of media, first, second, third, and third 4 media messages) (eg, first, second, third, and fourth data) corresponding to the data (eg, via a wireless network). The computer system (eg, 700 ) responds, via the display generation component, to receiving the data, via the display generating component, a notification (eg, 1502 ) corresponding to the media message (eg, by the end of a period of time (eg, as described in more detail above). ) to display. While displaying the notification (eg, 1502 ), the computer system (eg, 700 ), via one or more input devices, selects a notification (eg, 1550a ) (eg, a notification displayed on a lock screen - the notification is a corresponding to the group, the group of media being an ordered set - receives the activation of ). In some embodiments, displaying the media user interface occurs in response to receiving a selection (eg, 1550a) of a notification (eg, 1502). In some embodiments, playing the first media message occurs in response to receiving a selection (eg, 1550a) of a notification (eg, 1502).

Displaying the media user interface in response to selection of the notification and automatically playing the first media message enables the computer system to perform two functions (display and playback) in response to the same input, thereby enabling the computer system to This reduces the need to receive additional inputs to initiate playback. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) -Make the device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, the first representation (eg, 1524a), the second representation (eg, 1524b), and the third representation (eg, 1524c) are not displayed in a row (eg, the first, second, and second representations). 3 positions are not all on one line). In some embodiments, representations of the displayed media are not displayed in a row (eg, as representations are removed and new representations are added).

According to some embodiments, the first size is greater than the second size. In some embodiments, the second size is greater than the third size. In some embodiments, the second size and the third size are the same size. In some embodiments, the representation of the currently playing media file (eg, 1524a in FIG. 15B , 1524b in FIG. 15C ) is displayed at a size greater than the size of multiple other (eg, all) displayed representations of the media message.

Displaying representations of various media messages in increasingly larger sizes provides feedback to the user regarding the order of the media messages. For example, if the representation is larger, then the corresponding media message is earlier in the ordered set of media messages, with (eg) the largest representation being the currently playing media item. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In accordance with some embodiments, in response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message (eg, reaching the end of the first media message by playing to the end of the first media message), do not receive additional user input ( or play the second media message (eg, output audio and/or video of the second media) without requiring it. In some embodiments, the second media message is played at a first size and in a first location with displaying a second representation of the second media message.

Automatically playing the second media message upon completion of the response of the first media message eliminates the need for the computer system to receive additional inputs to initiate playback of the second media message. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) -Make the device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting completion of playback of the second media message (eg, reaching the end of the second media message; skipping the remainder of the first media), the computer system receives additional user input Play the third media message without (or not requiring) (eg output the audio and/or video of the third media message). In some embodiments, the third media message is played at a first size and in a first position with displaying a third representation of the third media message. In some embodiments, the fifth representation of the fifth media is not displayed after detecting completion of playback of the second media message.

According to some embodiments, prior to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, a fourth representation (eg, 1524d) of a fourth media message (eg, audio media; visual media; audiovisual media) (eg, FIG. 15b, not displayed concurrently with the first representation of the first media (in the media user interface). After (eg, in response to) detecting completion of playback of the first media message (eg, reaching the end of the first media message by playing to the end of the first media message) (in some embodiments, the first media message In response to detecting completion of playback of the , 1524d) (eg, at a third size and in a third position) (in some embodiments, the fourth media message is displayed concurrently with the second and third representations of the media message).

Displaying representations of a first predetermined number of media messages of a group of media messages without displaying representations of additional media messages in the group of media until the media message is played and the representation of the played media message is removed Provides feedback to the user that additional media messages are available for playback without disrupting the user interface. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, when the media user interface was initially displayed (eg, in response to selection of the displayed notification), the media user interface does not include a fourth representation, but a first representation, a second representation, and a third representation. include expression.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting completion of playback of the third media message (eg, reaching the end of the third media message; skipping the remainder of the third media message), (eg, as shown in FIG. 15E ) a fourth representation of the fourth media message without receiving (or requiring) user input at a size different from the first size (eg, greater than the first size) and at a location different from the first size 1524d) and play the fourth media message.

According to some embodiments, while playing the second media message, the computer system (eg, 700 ), when activated (eg, upon detecting a tap above), indicates completion of the playback of the second media message (eg, ceasing playback of the currently playing media message; suspending playback of the remainder of the second media message; skipping the remainder of the second media message (and optionally, playing the third media message) to display the next media user interface object (eg, 1534 ) within the media user interface (eg, 1520 ). While playing the second media message, the computer system (eg, 700), via one or more input devices, activates the next media user interface object (eg, 1534) (eg, taps on the next media user interface object). receive In response to receiving the activation of the next media user interface object (eg, 1534 ), the computer system (eg, 700 ) not, via the display creation component, display, via the display creation component, a second representation of the second media message. and display the third representation of the third media message in the first location (and, optionally, at the first size). In some embodiments, the third media message is played with displaying a third representation of the third media message in the first location and in the first size. In some embodiments, the next media user interface object, when activated, causes completion of the currently playing media message. In some embodiments, detecting completion of the currently playing media message (eg, except when the currently playing media message is the last media message in the group of media) may be determined by the technique being the next media message in the ordered set. Proceed by playing In some embodiments, in response to receiving activation of the next media user interface object (eg, 1534 ), the computer system stops playing the second media message (eg, without playing to the end of the second media message). and play the third media message.

Displaying the next media user interface object enables the computer system to receive user input to skip to playing the next media message, without wasting additional time playing the remainder of the currently playing media message. Providing such additional controls to the user improves the operability of the device and enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating and/or interacting with the device). making it more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the computer system, when activated (eg, upon detecting a tap above), causes completion of playback of a (eg, second) media message and plays a previous (eg, first) media message. Do not display (eg, within the media user interface) the previous media user interface object that starts (eg, at the same time as playing the second media). In some embodiments, the computer system suspends displaying the next media user interface object when the last (eg, fourth) media message (eg, of a group of media) is playing (eg, as in FIG. 15E ). do.

In some embodiments, the first media message, the second media message, and the third media message are part of a group of media. Following playback of the last media message (eg, in response to detecting completion of playback) (eg, after playing or skipping all media messages of the group of media), a computer system (eg, 700 , via the display creation component, before proceeding to playing subsequent media messages (eg, second, third, and fourth media messages) when activated (eg, 1550f1 , detecting a tap above). A playback user interface object that plays the first media message (eg, outputs audio and/or video of the first media message) (eg, 926, in the first position, at which the fourth representation of the fourth media message was displayed). location) in the media user interface. In some embodiments, activation of the playback user interface object restarts the process again to play the media message of the group of media. In some embodiments, subsequent to playing the final media message (eg, of the group of media), the computer system causes the first, second, and third media messages (and optionally a fourth media message) from the computer system. ) (eg, after a predefined duration has elapsed) (or otherwise make the media message inaccessible to the user).

Displaying a play user interface object (eg, a play button) to play the media message of a group of media messages plays (and listens again to, replays) the media message without the user having to individually select each media message to play. make it Providing additional control options without cluttering the UI with additional displayed controls (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) of the device It improves operability and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

According to some embodiments, the first media message, the second media message, and the third media message (and, optionally, the fourth media message) are connected to devices including a computer system (eg, a plurality of devices in a home ( For example, home automation systems))). According to some embodiments, the computer system (eg, 700 ), via a display generation component, when activated (eg, 1550f2, detecting a tap above), is configured to send an audio multicast message to a target group of devices. A multicast affordance (eg, 736 ) that initiates the process is displayed in the media user interface. In some embodiments, a process for transmitting an audio multicast message includes displaying the user interface of FIG. 7C1 and is described with respect to FIG. 7C1 . In some embodiments, the one or more devices are electronic devices that are part of a group of electronic devices to which the first, second, and third media messages are directed.

Displaying a multicast affordance for initiating a process for transmitting an audio multicast message to one or more devices can be applied to a media message containing the messages without the need to individually select which users/devices will receive the message. It provides the user with the ability to respond, thereby reducing the number of inputs the user needs to provide in order to respond. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) -Make the device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, a process for transmitting an audio multicast message includes, in a computer system, recording the audio message. In some embodiments, the audio message is made available for playback on the computer system (eg, as part of a group of media). In some embodiments, the computer system deletes (or, optionally, a fourth media message) the first, second, and third media messages (and optionally the fourth media message) from the computer system along with sending the audio multicast message. make the message inaccessible to the user otherwise).

According to some embodiments, while playing a respective media message (eg, a first media message, a second media message), the computer system (eg, 700 ), via the display creation component and within the media user interface, each displays the name of each user (eg, 1524a, 1524b, 1524c, 1524d) for which the media message of ' was received. In some embodiments, as the media message being played changes, each user's name is replaced (eg, previous name, current name, next name are displayed in the same location).

Displaying the respective user's name from which the currently playing media was received provides the user with feedback regarding the source from which the computer system received the currently playing media message. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

According to some embodiments, the representation of the currently playing media message (eg, 1524a in FIG. 15B , 1524b in FIG. 15C ) is the respective displayed representation of the media message that is not currently playing (eg, 1524b and 1524c in FIG. 15B ). , are displayed with a first background color (eg, green) that is different from the background color of 1524c and 1524d in FIG. 15C .

According to some embodiments, the media message is audio messages (eg, multicast audio messages). In some embodiments, an audio message (eg, a first media message) is an audio message recorded (using a microphone) at an external device and transmitted by the external device to a group of devices, and/or a plurality, including a computer system, It is an audio message directed to (eg, sent to) external devices of In some embodiments, the second media message is a second audio message directed to (or sent to) a second plurality of external devices (eg, the same as the plurality of external devices, different from the plurality of external devices). am.

Automatically playing (eg, in order) multiple audio messages of a conversation (eg, an audio conversation between multiple participants) causes the computer system to output the conversation without requiring the user to individually select specific audio messages to play. and thereby reducing the number of required inputs. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) -Make the device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, a total count of media messages within a group of media (eg, “4” of “1 of 4” in 930 of FIG. 15B ) is displayed. In some embodiments, the number of media currently playing (eg, along with a total count) (eg, “1” of “1 of 4” in 930 of FIG. 15B , within an ordered set of groups of media) is displayed (eg, “3 of 4” as in FIG. 15D).

In some embodiments, the media message (eg, the first media message) corresponds to a multi-user device (eg, a device configured for multiple users, a device not configured for a particular user). In some embodiments, the media message (eg, the second media message) corresponds to a single user device (eg, a device configured for a single user). In some embodiments, the corresponding user's visual indicator of the media message (eg, 1522a, 1524a, 1522c, 1524c) is displayed concurrently with playing the media message corresponding to the user. In some embodiments, a visual indicator representing the multi-user device (eg, 1522b, 1524b) is displayed while playing a media message corresponding to the multi-user device.

Note that the details of the processes described above with respect to method 1600 (eg, FIG. 16 ) are also applicable in a manner similar to the methods described above. For example, method 1600 optionally includes one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to methods 800 , 1000 , 1400 . For another example, the audio message of method 800 may be the same as the audio message transmitted in method 1600 . As another example, the displayed notifications described in connection with method 800 may be the same notification displayed in method 1600 . As another example, the voice input transmitted to one or more devices in connection with method 1200 may be the same audio message received and played back at the computer system of method 1600 . For the sake of brevity, these details have not been repeated above.

The foregoing description, for purposes of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. The embodiments have been chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Accordingly, those skilled in the art will be able to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

While the present disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it should be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. It is to be understood that such changes and modifications are included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.

As described above, one aspect of the technique is a user of visual content (eg, visual indications) or any other content that provides information to the user regarding whether the voice input will be transmitted as an audio message to one or more devices. It is the collection and use of data available from a variety of sources to improve its delivery to people. The present invention contemplates that, in some cases, such collected data may include personal information data that may be used to uniquely identify or contact or locate a particular individual.

The present invention recognizes that the use of personal information data in the present technique can be used to benefit users. For example, personal information data may be used to improve the display of an indication such that the respective user can determine whether the voice input is to be sent as an audio message. Thus, the use of such personal information data allows users to have computational control over the transmission of audio messages. In addition, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present invention.

The present invention contemplates that entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transmission, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities must implement and continue to use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industrial or administrative requirements for keeping personal information data private and secure. Such policies should be readily accessible by users and updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. Personal information from users must be collected for the legitimate and appropriate uses of the entity and must not be shared or sold outside of these legitimate uses. Also, such collection/sharing must occur after receiving informed consent from users. Additionally, such entities are encouraged to secure and secure access to such personal information data and to take any necessary steps to ensure that others having access to personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. should be considered In addition, such entities may themselves be assessed by third parties to prove their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. Additionally, policies and practices should be adapted to the specific types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed, and should be adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For example, in the United States, the collection or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); Health data in different countries may be subject to different laws and policies and should be processed accordingly. Accordingly, different privacy practices must be maintained for different types of personal data in each country.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the present invention also contemplates embodiments in which a user selectively blocks access to, or use of, personal information data. That is, the present invention contemplates that hardware and/or software elements may be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of receiving voice input from a user, the technique allows users to "agree" or "disagree" to participate in the collection of personal information data during or at any time after registration for services. may be configured to allow selection. In another example, users may choose not to provide voice input to be transmitted as an audio message based on the indication displayed. In another example, users may choose to limit the content of the audio message corresponding to the voice input based on the displayed indication. In addition to providing “accept” and “disagree” options, this disclosure contemplates providing notifications regarding access or use of personal information. For example, a user may be notified upon downloading an app whose personal data will be accessed and then be reminded again just before the personal data is accessed by the app.

Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and processed in a manner that minimizes the risks of unintended or unauthorized access or use. Risks can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data when it is no longer needed. Additionally, and when applicable, including applicable to certain health related applications, data de-identification may be used to protect the user's privacy. By removing certain identifiers (eg, date of birth, etc.), where appropriate, by controlling the amount or specificity of the data stored (eg, by collecting location data at the city level rather than the address level), the manner in which the data is stored De-identification may be facilitated by controlling (eg, aggregating data across users), and/or by other methods.

Thus, while the present invention broadly covers the use of personal information data to implement one or more of the various disclosed embodiments, the invention also contemplates that various embodiments may also be implemented without the need to access such personal information data. do. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or part of such personal information data. For example, the visual indication may indicate a minimal amount of personal or non-personal information data, such as content requested by a device associated with the user, other non-personal information available for audio messaging services, or publicly available information. It may be displayed to users based on the information.

Claims (98)

As a method,
In a computer system in communication with the display generating component,
Via the display generating component,
first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising one or more external devices comprising a first set of and a second set of one or more external devices; and
a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to a first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device; displaying a first user interface to
receiving, while displaying the first user interface, an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and
in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, displaying the second user interface, the second user interface comprising:
a second selectable user interface object, wherein the selection of the second selectable user interface object results in the selection of the one or more initiating a process for transmitting to a second set of external devices; and
a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to a second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device; How to. The method of claim 1 , wherein the first external accessory device is different from the second external accessory device. 3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the first selectable user interface object is displayed in a first location via the display creation component, and the second selectable user interface object is displayed in the first position via the display creation component. displayed in position, the method. 4. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
the first external accessory device is included in the set of external devices;
The first user interface includes a third accessory control user interface object corresponding to a third external accessory device, and the selection of the third accessory control user interface object sends a command to change the state of the third external accessory device initiating a process for
wherein the third external accessory device is not included in the set of external devices, and the selection of the first selectable user interface object does not initiate a process for sending the first audio message to the third external accessory device. Way. 5. The device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location, and the second user interface corresponds to a first lower level location of a first type, and the one or more external devices. a second set of ones corresponds to the first sub-location, and the second set of one or more external devices is a second set of the first type based on the second set of one or more external devices corresponding to the first sub-location. 2 A method, which cannot be made to correspond to a sub-position. 6. The second user interface according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location, and the second user interface corresponds to a plurality of lower locations of the first type. corresponding to 3 sub-locations, wherein the second set of one or more external devices corresponds to the third sub-location based on which the second set of one or more external devices is included in the plurality of sub-locations of the first type. How to. 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the second external accessory device is associated with a third sub-location of the second type, the second external accessory device further comprising a fourth sub-location of the second type that is different from the third sub-location. A method associated with a location. 7. The device of any preceding claim, wherein the second set of one or more external devices is associated with a first location, records the second audio message and transmits the second audio message to the one or more external devices. wherein the process for transmitting to the second set of one or more external devices without transmitting to the first set of devices includes displaying an indication of the first location. 9. A method according to any preceding claim, wherein the set of external devices comprises a personal mobile electronic device. 10. The method of any preceding claim, wherein the second set of one or more external devices does not include a personal mobile electronic device. 11. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
subsequent to displaying the second user interface, receiving an input to disable transmission of audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices; and
In response to receiving the input for disabling transmission of audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices, via selection of the first selectable user interface object and the second selectable user interface object and disabling transmission of audio messages to the second set of one or more external devices through selection of 12. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the first user interface corresponds to a higher level location and the second user interface corresponds to a lower location of the higher level location, the method comprising:
receiving, at a microphone in communication with the computer system, audio input comprising a natural language request to a digital assistant, the audio input comprising:
instructions to initiate a process for sending an audio message;
location identifier; and
Contains audio messages -;
Upon determining that the location identifier corresponds to the higher level location,
establish a two-way audio communication channel with any devices in the set of external devices for playback in the set of external devices including the first set of one or more external devices and the second set of one or more external devices transmitting the audio message without interruption; and
Upon determining that the location identifier corresponds to the sub-location,
establishing a two-way audio communication channel with any devices of the set of external devices for playback in a second set of the one or more external devices but not for playback in the first set of one or more external devices Without this, the method further comprising the step of transmitting the audio message. 13. The method of any of the preceding claims, wherein initiating a process for recording and transmitting an audio message to external devices comprises:
initiating the recording of a new audio message without additional user input; and
A method comprising displaying a recording user interface comprising dynamic indications of audio being recorded. 14. The process according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the computer system communicates with one or more input devices including a microphone, and records and transmits the first audio message to the set of external devices. Is,
receiving, via the microphone, a second audio input; and
sending the first audio message to the set of external devices, the first audio message based on the second audio input. 15. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component, the one or more programs comprising: the method of any one of claims 1-14. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions for performing A computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
15. A computer system comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 1-14. A computer system comprising:
A computer system comprising means for performing the method of claim 1 . A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component, the one or more programs comprising:
Via the display generating component,
first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising one or more external devices comprising a first set of and a second set of one or more external devices; and
a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to a first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device; for displaying a first user interface to
while displaying the first user interface, for receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and
in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, comprising instructions for displaying the second user interface, the second user interface comprising:
a second selectable user interface object, wherein the selection of the second selectable user interface object results in the selection of the one or more initiating a process for transmitting to a second set of external devices; and
a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to a second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device; a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, wherein the computer system is in communication with a display generating component; and
a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising:
Via the display generating component,
first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising one or more external devices comprising a first set of and a second set of one or more external devices; and
a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to a first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device; for displaying a first user interface to
while displaying the first user interface, for receiving an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and
in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, comprising instructions for displaying the second user interface, the second user interface comprising:
a second selectable user interface object, wherein the selection of the second selectable user interface object results in the selection of the one or more initiating a process for transmitting to a second set of external devices; and
a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to a second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device; which is a computer system. A computer system comprising:
via a display generating component in communication with the computer system;
first selectable user interface object - selection of the first selectable user interface object initiates a process for recording and sending a first audio message to a set of external devices, the set of external devices comprising one or more external devices comprising a first set of and a second set of one or more external devices; and
a first accessory control user interface object corresponding to a first external accessory device, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the first external accessory device; means for displaying a first user interface to
means for receiving, while displaying the first user interface, an input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface; and
in response to receiving the request to display the second user interface, means for displaying the second user interface, the second user interface comprising:
a second selectable user interface object, wherein the selection of the second selectable user interface object results in the selection of the one or more initiating a process for transmitting to a second set of external devices; and
a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to a second external accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object initiates a process for sending a command to change a state of the second external accessory device; which is a computer system. As a method,
In a computer system in communication with the display generating component,
receiving first data corresponding to a first medium;
displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having an indication of the first media until an end of a first period of time;
after receiving the first data, receiving second data corresponding to a second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and
the display generating component according to a determination that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time when the second data was received and (2) a time when the first data was received displaying a second notification with an indication of the first media until the end of the second period of time, the end of the first period being different from the end of the second period of time. 22. The method of claim 21, wherein the first notification is being displayed at the time the second data is received, and displaying the second notification comprises ceasing to display the first notification. 23. The method of claim 21 or 22, wherein the first media is a first audio message. 24. The method of any of claims 21-23, wherein the first notification comprises an indication of a group of a plurality of external devices to which the first media was directed. 25. The method of any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the method comprises:
in response to receiving the first data, adding the first notification to a set of notifications until the end of the first period of time;
Upon reaching the end of said first period,
removing the first notification from the set of notifications; and
prior to the end of the first period, upon receiving the second data corresponding to the second media, and upon determining that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria;
remove the first notification from the set of notifications;
and adding the second notification to the set of notifications. 26. The method of any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the first data identifies a target group of a plurality of external devices to which the first media is directed, the method comprising:
receiving third data corresponding to a third media while displaying a notification corresponding to the first media; and
In response to receiving the third data corresponding to the third media,
in response to determining that the third media satisfies the set of one or more criteria, extend a duration during which the notification corresponding to the first media is displayed;
and in response to determining that the third media does not meet the set of one or more criteria, withholding from extending a duration for which the notification corresponding to the first media is displayed. 27. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 26,
in accordance with the determination that the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria, the second notification comprises an indicator based on a number of media, including the first media, represented by the second notification; Way. 28. The method of any one of claims 21-27, wherein the second notification comprises an indication of the first media, the method comprising:
while displaying the second notification, receiving an input for the second notification; and
in response to receiving the input for the second notification, initiating a process for playing the first media and the second media. 29. The method of any one of claims 21-28, wherein the second media satisfies the set of one or more criteria, the method comprising:
while displaying the second notification, receiving an input for the second notification; and
in response to receiving the input for the second notification, displaying a user interface for playing the first media, the user interface for playing the first media comprising a record user interface object; further comprising,
The selection of the record user interface object comprises:
in accordance with a determination that the first data identifies a first group of a plurality of external devices to which the first media is directed, initiate a process for sending an audio message to the first group of external devices;
according to a determination that the first data identifies a second group of a plurality of external devices directed to the first media, wherein the first data is different from the first group, sending an audio message to the second group of external devices. A method for initiating a process. 30. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 29,
receiving user input while displaying a user interface for playing the first media and while playing the first media;
in response to receiving the user input and in accordance with a determination that the user input is for a first location on the user interface for playing the first media, displaying a user interface for recording and transmitting new media. ; and
in response to receiving the user input and in accordance with a determination that the user input is for a second location on the user interface for playing the first media, display the user interface for playing the first media. replacing the display of a user interface for playing the second media, wherein the second location on the user interface for playing the first media is the user interface for playing the first media. different from the first position on the 31. The method of any one of claims 21 to 30, wherein the method comprises:
while displaying the second notification, receiving an input for the second notification; and
in response to receiving the input for the second notification, ceasing to display the second notification. 32. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 31,
further comprising displaying a user interface for configuring whether to include the computer system in a group of a plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to a location, wherein the group includes the computer system The user interface for configuring whether to
a first option for including the computer system in the group of the plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to the location, regardless of a current physical location of the computer system; and
and a second option not to include the computer system in the group of the plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to the location, regardless of the current physical location of the computer system. 33. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 32,
further comprising displaying a user interface for configuring whether to include the computer system in a group of a plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to a location, wherein the group includes the computer system The user interface for configuring whether to
a third option, wherein the third option comprises:
include the computer system in the group of the plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to the location when the computer system is currently at the physical location corresponding to the location;
and do not include the computer system in the group of the plurality of external devices that receive data corresponding to media directed to the location when the computer system is not currently at the physical location corresponding to the location. 34. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component, the one or more programs comprising: the method of any one of claims 21-33 A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions for performing A computer system comprising:
one or more processors; and
34. A computer system comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 21-33. A computer system comprising:
34. A computer system comprising means for performing the method of any one of claims 21-33. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component, the one or more programs comprising:
for receiving first data corresponding to the first media;
displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having a presentation of the first media until an end of a first period of time;
after receiving the first data, receiving second data corresponding to a second medium, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and
the display generating component according to a determination that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time when the second data was received and (2) a time when the first data was received to display, until the end of a second period of time, a second notification having an indication of the first media, the end of the first period being different from the end of the second period of time, comprising instructions A temporary computer-readable storage medium. A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, wherein the computer system is in communication with a display generating component; and
a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising:
for receiving first data corresponding to the first media;
displaying, via the display generating component, a first notification having a presentation of the first media until an end of a first period of time;
after receiving the first data, receiving second data corresponding to a second medium, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and
the display generating component according to a determination that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time when the second data was received and (2) a time when the first data was received to display, until the end of a second period of time, a second notification having an indication of the first media, the end of the first period being different from the end of the second period of time, the computer comprising: system. A computer system comprising:
means for receiving first data corresponding to a first media;
means for displaying, via a generating component in communication with the computer system, a first notification having an indication of the first media until an end of a first period of time;
means for receiving, after receiving the first data, second data corresponding to a second media, wherein the second media is different from the first media; and
the display generating component according to a determination that the second media satisfies a set of one or more criteria and upon a determination based on (1) a time when the second data was received and (2) a time when the first data was received means for displaying, until the end of a second period of time, a second notification having an indication of the first media, the end of the first period being different from the end of the second period of time, the computer comprising: system. As a method,
In an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices,
receiving voice input via the one or more microphones; and
displaying a visual indication of the voice input;
In accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to a voice input to be transmitted to one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices displays the visual indication in a first set of one or more colors. comprising the steps of;
In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices includes the first set of one or more colors. displaying the visual indication in a second set of one or more colors different from 41. The method of claim 40, wherein the voice input requesting the electronic device to retrieve information or change one or more states of the electronic device does not include the instruction to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices. Voice input, method. 42. The method of claim 40 or 41,
the voice input corresponding to the voice input to be transmitted to the one or more devices includes an identifier for a group of devices;
wherein the voice input that does not include the instruction to send any portion of the voice input to other devices does not include the identifier for the group of devices. 43. The method of any one of claims 40-42, wherein the first set of one or more colors is a solid color and the second set of one or more colors is a plurality of colors. 44. The method of any one of claims 40-43, wherein displaying the visual indication in the first set of one or more colors comprises displaying an animation that changes over a period of time based on the voice input. How to. 45. The method of any one of claims 40-44, wherein displaying the animation comprises: brightness, size, color saturation of the visual representation based on one or more of a volume or a pitch of the voice input. , or changing one or more of the locations. 46. The method according to any one of claims 40 to 45,
receiving data corresponding to a plurality of audio messages for playback; and
in response to receiving the data corresponding to the plurality of audio messages for playback, before outputting each respective one of the plurality of audio messages, outputting an introductory tone comprising, the method. 47. The method according to any one of claims 40 to 46,
receiving data corresponding to an audio message for playback; and
responsive to receiving the data, automatically, without user input, outputting the audio message. 48. The method of claim 47,
and prior to outputting the audio message, displaying a second visual indication in response to receiving the data. 49. The method according to any one of claims 40 to 48,
receiving data corresponding to an audio message for playback;
outputting the audio message; and
while outputting the audio message, concurrently displaying an unaltered visual indication based on one or more characteristics of the audio message. 50. The method of claim 49, wherein the audio message is output based on a volume level of the electronic device. 51. The method of any of claims 40-50, wherein the electronic device does not display visual content before the visual indication is displayed. 52. The method according to any one of claims 40 to 51,
ceasing to display the visual indication, including ceasing to display visual content via the one or more display devices. 53. The method of any of claims 40-52, wherein the visual indication is not displayed concurrently with another visual indication. 54. The method of any of claims 40-53, wherein the visual indication is a lighting indication that provides different lights based on the status of one or more applications communicating with the electronic device. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices, the one or more programs comprising: 55. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 40-54. An electronic device comprising:
one or more microphones;
one or more speakers;
one or more display devices;
one or more processors; and
55. An electronic device comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 40-54. An electronic device comprising:
one or more microphones;
one or more speakers;
one or more display devices; and
55. An electronic device comprising means for performing the method of any one of claims 40 to 54. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device having one or more microphones, one or more speakers, and one or more display devices, the one or more programs comprising:
for receiving voice input via the one or more microphones; and
instructions for displaying a visual indication of the voice input;
In accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to a voice input to be transmitted to one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in a first set of one or more colors. including;
In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices includes the first set of one or more colors; and displaying the visual indication in a second set of one or more different colors. An electronic device comprising:
one or more microphones;
one or more speakers;
one or more display devices;
one or more processors; and
a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising:
for receiving voice input via the one or more microphones; and
instructions for displaying a visual indication of the voice input;
In accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to a voice input to be transmitted to one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in a first set of one or more colors. including;
In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices includes the first set of one or more colors; and displaying the visual indication in a second set of different one or more colors. An electronic device comprising:
one or more microphones;
one or more speakers;
one or more display devices;
means for receiving voice input via the one or more microphones; and
means for displaying a visual indication of the voice input;
In accordance with a determination that the portion of the voice input corresponds to a voice input to be transmitted to one or more devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices comprises: displaying the visual indication in a first set of one or more colors. including;
In accordance with a determination that the voice input does not include instructions to transmit any portion of the voice input to other devices, displaying the visual indication via the one or more display devices includes the first set of one or more colors; and displaying the visual indication in a second set of different one or more colors. As a method,
A computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, comprising:
displaying, via the display generating component, a first status indicator indicating that a plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type comprising:
a first accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state; and
a second accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state and different from the first accessory device;
detecting a gesture while displaying the first status indicator; and
In response to detecting the gesture,
according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for the first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state;
In accordance with a determination that the gesture is a second type of gesture different from the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, a user controlling, via the display generating component, a first accessory corresponding to the first accessory device. displaying an interface object, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state. Including method. 62. The method of claim 61,
in accordance with the determination that the gesture is for the first status indicator and is a gesture of the second type different from the first type of gesture, via the display creation component and concurrently with the first accessory control user interface object; displaying a second accessory control user interface object corresponding to the second accessory device, wherein selection of the second accessory control user interface object does not cause the first accessory device to change to the second state causing an accessory device to change to the second state. 63. The gesture of claim 61 or 62, wherein the gesture comprises: a second status indicator indicating that a plurality of accessory devices of a second accessory type different from the first accessory type are in a third state; , detected during simultaneous display, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of the second accessory type are:
a third accessory device of the second accessory type and in the third state; and
a fourth accessory device of the second accessory type and in the third state;
The method is
in response to determining that the gesture is the first type of gesture and is for the second status indicator, causing the third accessory device and the fourth accessory device to change to a fourth state different from the third state; and
in response to determining that the gesture is the second type of gesture and is for the second status indicator, displaying, via the display creation component, a third accessory control user interface object corresponding to the third accessory device; and selecting the third accessory control user interface object causes the third accessory device to change to the fourth state without causing the fourth accessory device to change to the fourth state. 64. The method according to any one of claims 61 to 63,
according to a determination that a fifth accessory device is of the first accessory device type and that the fifth accessory device is in the first state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type include the fifth accessory device;
According to a determination that the fifth accessory device is the first accessory device type and the fifth accessory device is not in the first state, the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type do not include the fifth accessory device. , Way. 65. The method of any one of claims 61-64,
the first type of gesture is a tap gesture;
wherein the second type of gesture is a press-and-hold gesture. 66. The method of any one of claims 61 to 65,
In response to detecting the gesture,
in response to determining that the gesture is a third type of gesture, displaying a previously undisplayed status indicator. 67. The method of any one of claims 61 to 66, wherein causing the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to the second state causes the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to the first accessory device. A method comprising performing some type of action based on an accessory type. 68. The method of any one of claims 61 to 67,
prior to detecting the gesture, further comprising: displaying a third status indicator adjacent the first status indicator and a fourth status indicator adjacent the third status indicator, wherein the first status indicator; wherein the third and fourth status indicators are displayed in an order based on respective status indicator categories corresponding to respective respective status indicators. 69. The method according to any one of claims 61 to 68,
and in response to determining that the gesture is the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, ceasing to display the first status indicator after a predetermined period of time. 70. The method of any one of claims 61 to 69,
the first status indicator is displayed in a first position when the gesture is detected;
The method is
In accordance with a determination that the gesture is the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, stop displaying the first status indicator at the first location and display a sixth status indicator at the first location and wherein the sixth status indicator was adjacent to the first status indicator before the gesture was detected. 71. The method according to any one of claims 61 to 70,
In accordance with the determination that the gesture is a gesture of the first type and is for the first status indicator, from indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of the first accessory type are in the first state, the first accessory type and visually updating the first status indicator such that the first status indicator changes to indicate that a plurality of accessory devices of . 72. The method according to any one of claims 61 to 71,
the first status indicator is displayed on a first user interface;
The method is
receiving a request to display a second user interface different from the first user interface; and
In response to receiving the request to display the second user interface,
further comprising displaying the second user interface comprising a status indicator indicating that one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type are in the first state;
In accordance with a determination that the second user interface corresponds to the first group of accessory devices and the first accessory device corresponds to the first group of accessory devices, the one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type are selected from the first accessory. including a device;
Upon determining that the second user interface corresponds to the first group of accessory devices and the first accessory device does not correspond to the first group of accessory devices, the one or more accessory devices of the first accessory type are 1 A method, which does not include an accessory device. 73. The method according to any one of claims 61 to 72,
Prior to detecting the gesture, an eighth state indicator is displayed indicating that one or more accessory devices of a third accessory type are in a seventh state, wherein the one or more accessory devices include an eighth accessory device of the third accessory type. do;
The method is
upon determining that the gesture is the second type of gesture and is for the eighth status indicator,
according to a determination that the eighth status indicator corresponds to less than a predetermined number of accessory devices of the third accessory type in the seventh state, display an eighth accessory control user interface object corresponding to the eighth accessory device and - selection of the eighth accessory control user interface object causes the eighth accessory device to change to an eighth state;
display a ninth accessory control user interface object corresponding to the eighth accessory device, according to a determination that the eighth status indicator corresponds to the third accessory type or more in the seventh state; 9. The method further comprising: selecting the 9 accessory control user interface object causes the eighth accessory device to change to a ninth state different from the eighth state. 74. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising: A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions for performing the method of claim 1 . A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, the computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices; and
74. A computer system comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 61-73. A computer system comprising:
74. A computer system comprising means for performing the method of any one of claims 61-73. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more input devices comprising:
for displaying, via the display generating component, a first status indicator indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are:
a first accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state; and
a second accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state and different from the first accessory device;
while displaying the first status indicator, for detecting a gesture; and
In response to detecting the gesture,
according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for the first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state;
In accordance with a determination that the gesture is a second type of gesture different from the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, a user controlling, via the display generating component, a first accessory corresponding to the first accessory device. instructions for displaying an interface object, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising: A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, the computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices; and
a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising:
for displaying, via the display generating component, a first status indicator indicating that the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, wherein the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are:
a first accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state; and
a second accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state and different from the first accessory device;
while displaying the first status indicator, for detecting a gesture; and
In response to detecting the gesture,
according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for the first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state;
In accordance with a determination that the gesture is a second type of gesture different from the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, a user controlling, via the display generating component, a first accessory corresponding to the first accessory device. instructions for displaying an interface object, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state. computer systems, including A computer system comprising:
means for displaying, via the display generating component, a first status indicator indicating that a plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type are in a first state, the plurality of accessory devices of a first accessory type comprising:
a first accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state; and
a second accessory device of the first accessory type and in the first state and different from the first accessory device;
means for detecting a gesture while displaying the first status indicator; and
In response to detecting the gesture,
according to a determination that the gesture is a gesture of a first type and is for the first status indicator, cause the first accessory device and the second accessory device to change to a second state different from the first state;
In accordance with a determination that the gesture is a second type of gesture different from the first type of gesture and is for the first status indicator, a user controlling, via the display generating component, a first accessory corresponding to the first accessory device. means for displaying an interface object, wherein selection of the first accessory control user interface object causes the first accessory device to change to the second state without causing the second accessory device to change to the second state comprising, a computer system. As a method,
A computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, comprising:
displaying, via the display creation component, a media user interface, the media user interface comprising:
at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and
at a second location different from the first location, comprising a second representation of a second media message;
playing the first media message in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on user input corresponding to the media user interface; and
In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message,
displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. 81. The method of claim 80,
displaying the first representation of the first media message in the first location comprises displaying the first representation of the first media message in the first location and at a first size;
wherein displaying the second representation of the second media message in the second location comprises displaying a second representation of the second media message in the second location and at a second size different from the first size; Way. 82. The method of claim 80 or 81,
concurrently with, via the display generating component, the first representation of the first media message at the first location and the second representation of the second media message at the second location;
displaying a third representation of a third media message at a third size different from the first size and at a third location different from the first location and the second location; and
In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message,
display, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message at the first size and at the first location without displaying the first representation of the first media message;
and displaying a third representation of the third media message at the second size and at the second location. 83. The method of any one of claims 80-82,
receiving data corresponding to a media message comprising the first media message being a first message from a first remote user and the second media message being a second message from a second remote user different from the first remote user ;
displaying, via the display generating component, a notification corresponding to the media message; and
while displaying the notification, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a selection of the notification;
displaying the media user interface occurs in response to receiving the selection of the notification;
and playing the first media message occurs in response to receiving the selection of the notification. 84. The method of any one of claims 80-83, wherein the first size is greater than the second size and the third size. 85. The method of any one of claims 80 to 84,
responsive to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, playing the second media message without receiving additional user input. 86. The method according to any one of claims 80 to 85, wherein prior to detecting completion of playback of the first media message, a fourth representation of a fourth media message is not displayed concurrently with the first representation of the first media message. , the method is
after detecting completion of playback of the first media message, displaying, via the display generating component, a fourth representation of the fourth media message. 87. The method of claim 85 or 86,
while playing the second media message, displaying in the media user interface a next media user interface object that, when activated, causes completion of playback of the second media message;
receiving, via the one or more input devices, activation of the next media user interface object while playing the second media message; and
In response to receiving the activation of the next media user interface object, via the display generating component, the third at the first location without displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message. and displaying a third representation of the media message. 88. The method according to any one of claims 80 to 87,
displaying, via the display creation component, a playback user interface object in the media user interface that, following playing the last media message, plays the first media message before proceeding to playing a subsequent media message when activated A method, further comprising a step. 89. The method of any one of claims 80-88, wherein the first media message, the second media message, and the third media message are directed to a target group of devices including the computer system, the method comprising:
and displaying, via the display creation component, a multicast affordance in the media user interface that, when activated, initiates a process for sending an audio multicast message to the target group of devices. 90. The method according to any one of claims 80 to 89,
while playing the respective media message, displaying, via the display creation component and within the media user interface, the name of the respective user from whom the respective media message was received. 91. A method according to any one of claims 80 to 90, wherein the representation of the currently playing media message is displayed with a first background color that is different from the background color of respective displayed representations of the media message that is not currently playing. 92. A method according to any one of claims 80 to 91, wherein the media message is audio messages. 93. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising: A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions for performing the method of claim 1 . A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, the computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices; and
93. A computer system comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 80-92. A computer system comprising:
93. A computer system comprising means for performing the method of any one of claims 80-92. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more input devices comprising:
for displaying, via the display creation component, a media user interface, the media user interface comprising:
at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and
at a second location different from the first location, comprising a second representation of a second media message;
in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface, to play the first media message; and
In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message,
and instructions for displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message. A computer system comprising:
one or more processors, the computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices; and
a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising:
for displaying, via the display creation component, a media user interface, the media user interface comprising:
at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and
at a second location different from the first location, comprising a second representation of a second media message;
in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on a user input corresponding to the media user interface, to play the first media message; and
In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message,
and displaying a second representation of the second media message without displaying, via the display generating component, a representation corresponding to the first media message. A computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, comprising:
means for displaying, via the display creation component, a media user interface, the media user interface comprising:
at a first location, a first representation of a first media message, and
at a second location different from the first location, comprising a second representation of a second media message;
means for playing the first media message in response to displaying the media user interface and not based on user input corresponding to the media user interface; and
In response to detecting completion of playback of the first media message,
means for displaying, via the display generating component, a second representation of the second media message without displaying a representation corresponding to the first media message.

Images